LTE Physical Layer

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.
0 (2007-11)
Technical Specification
3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE Physical Layer - General Description (Release 8)
The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organisational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organisational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification. Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organisational Partners' Publications Offices.
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
Keywords
UMTS, radio, layer 1
3GPP Postal address
3GPP support office address

650 Route des Lucioles - Sophia Antipolis Valbonne - FRANCE Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16
Internet
http://www.3gpp.org
Copyright Notification No part may be reproduced except as authorized by written permission. The copyright and the foregoing restriction extend to reproduction in all media.
2007, 3GPP Organizational Partners (ARIB, ATIS, CCSA, ETSI, TTA, TTC). All rights reserved.
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
Contents
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................4 1 2 3
3.1 3.2 3.3
Scope ........................................................................................................................................................5 References ................................................................................................................................................5 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................5

Definitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 5 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 5 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 6
4
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5
General description of LTE Layer 1 ........................................................................................................6

Relation to other layers ...................................................................................................................................... 6 General Protocol Architecture...................................................................................................................... 6 Service provided to higher layers................................................................................................................. 7 General description of Layer 1 .......................................................................................................................... 7 Multiple Access............................................................................................................................................ 7 Physical channels and modulation ............................................................................................................... 8 Channel coding and interleaving.................................................................................................................. 8 Physical layer procedures............................................................................................................................. 9 Physical layer measurements ....................................................................................................................... 9
5
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
Document structure of LTE physical layer specification .........................................................................9

Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 9 TS 36.201: Physical layer General description ............................................................................................... 9 TS 36.211: Physical channels and modulation ................................................................................................ 10 TS 36.212: Multiplexing and channel coding .................................................................................................. 10 TS 36.213: Physical layer procedures.............................................................................................................. 10 TS 36.214: Physical layer Measurements ..................................................................................................... 11
Annex A (informative): Annex B (informative):
Preferred mathematical notations................................................................12 Change history ...............................................................................................13
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
Foreword
This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows: Version x.y.z where: x the first digit: 1 presented to TSG for information; 2 presented to TSG for approval; 3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control. y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc. z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
Scope
The present document describes a general description of the physical layer of the E-UTRA radio interface. The present document also describes the document structure of the 3GPP physical layer specifications, i.e. TS 36.200 series. The TS 36.200 series specifies the Uu point for the 3G LTE mobile system, and defines the minimum level of specifications required for basic connections in terms of mutual connectivity and compatibility.
TS 36.2003G LTEUu
References
References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or non-specific. For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply. For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same Release as the present document. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications". 3GPP TS 36.211: "Physical channels and modulation". 3GPP TS 36.212: "Multiplexing and channel coding". 3GPP TS 36.213: "Physical layer procedures". 3GPP TS 36.214: "Physical layer Measurements".
The following documents contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the present document.
3
3.1
Definitions, symbols and abbreviations

Definitions
For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in TR 21.905 [1]. Definition format <defined term>: <definition>. example: text used to clarify abstract rules by applying them literally.
3.2
Symbols
For the purposes of the present document, the following symbols apply: Symbol format <symbol> <Explanation>
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
3.3
Abbreviations
For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. An abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in TR 21.905 [1]. Abbreviation format BPSK CQI CP CRC eNode-B E-UTRA FDD HARQ LTE MAC MBMS MBSFN MIMO OFDM PBCH PCFICH PDSCH PDCCH PHICH PMCH PRACH PUCCH PUSCH QAM QPP QPSK RRC RSSI RSRP RSRQ SAP SC-FDMA TDD TX Diversity UE <ACRONYM> Binary Phase Shift Keying Channel Quality Indicator Cyclic Prefix Cyclic Redundancy Check Evolved Node B Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Frequency Division Duplex Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request Long Term Evolution Medium Access Control Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service Multicast/Broadcast over Single Frequency Network / Multiple Input Multiple Output Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Physical Broadcast Channel Physical Control Format Indicator Channel Physical Downlink Shared Channel Physical Downlink Control Channel Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel HARQ Physical Multicast Channel Physical Random Access Channel Physical Uplink Control Channel Physical Uplink Shared Channel Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quadratic Permutation Polynomial Quadrature Phase Shift KeyingRLC Radio Link Control Radio Resource Control Received Signal Strength Indicator Reference Signal Received Power Reference Signal Received Quality Service Access Point Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access Time Division Duplex Transmit Diversity User Equipment <Explanation>
4
4.1
4.1.1
General description of LTE Layer 1

Relation to other layers
General Protocol Architecture
The radio interface described in this specification covers the interface between the User Equipment (UE) and the network. The radio interface is composed of the Layer 1, 2 and 3. The TS 36.200 series describes the Layer 1 (Physical Layer) specifications. Layers 2 and 3 are described in the 36.300 series. UE
TS 36.200Layer1PHY TS 36.300Layer2Layer3MACRRC
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
Layer 3 Control / Measurements
Radio Resource Control (RRC)
PHYPHYLayer2 MACLayer3RRC
MACRLC
Logical channels Medium Access Control Transport channels Physical layer
Layer 2
Layer 1
PHYMAC Figure 1: Radio interface protocol architecture around the physical layer
Figure 1 shows the E-UTRA radio interface protocol architecture around the physical layer (Layer 1). The physical layer interfaces the Medium Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of Layer 2 and the Radio Resource Control (RRC) Layer of Layer 3. The circles between different layer/sub-layers indicate Service Access Points (SAPs). The physical layer offers a transport channel to MAC. The transport channel is characterized by how the information is transferred over the radio interface. MAC offers different logical channels to the Radio Link Control (RLC) sub-layer of Layer 2. A logical channel is characterized by the type of information transferred.
4.1.2
Service provided to higher layers
The physical layer offers data transport services to higher layers. The access to these services is through the use of a transport channel via the MAC sub-layer. The physical layer is expected to perform the following functions in order to provide the data transport service:
Error detection on the transport channel and indication to higher layers FEC encoding/decoding of the transport channel FEC/ Hybrid ARQ soft-combining HARQ Rate matching of the coded transport channel to physical channels Mapping of the coded transport channel onto physical channels Power weighting of physical channels Modulation and demodulation of physical channels Frequency and time synchronisation Radio characteristics measurements and indication to higher layers Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) antenna processing MIMO Transmit Diversity (TX diversity) Beamforming RF processing. (Note: RF processing aspects are specified in the TS 36.100 series)
4.2
4.2.1
General description of Layer 1

Multiple Access
The multiple access scheme for the LTE physical layer is based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) with a cyclic prefix (CP) in the downlink, and on Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SCFDMA) with a cyclic prefix in the uplink. To support transmission in paired and unpaired spectrum, two duplex modes
OFDM SC-FDMA
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
FDDTDD are supported: Frequency Division Duplex (FDD), supporting full duplex and half duplex operation, and Time Division Duplex (TDD). 0.5ms1215KHz247.5KHz The Layer 1 is defined in a bandwidth agnostic way based on resource blocks, allowing the LTE Layer 1 to adapt to various spectrum allocations. A resource block spans either 12 sub-carriers with a sub-carrier bandwidth of 15kHz or 24 sub-carriers with a sub-carrier bandwidth of 7.5kHz each over a slot duration of 0.5ms. 1FDD10ms200.5ms1ms The radio frame structure type 1 is used for FDD (for both full duplex and half duplex operation) and has a duration of 10ms and consists of 20 slots with a slot duration of 0.5ms. Two adjacent slots form one sub-frame of length 1ms. The radio frame structure type 2 is used for TDD and consists of two half-frames with a duration of 5ms each and containing each 8 slots of length 0.5ms and three special fields (DwPTS, GP and UpPTS) which have configurable individual lengths and a total length of 1ms. A sub-frame consists of two adjacent slots, except for sub-frames 1 and 6, which consist of DwPTS, GP and UpPTS. Both 5ms and 10ms switch-point periodicity are supported. Further details on the LTE frame structure are specified in [2]. 2TDD5ms80.5ms1ms DwPTSGPUpPTS16 To support a Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS), LTE offers the possibility to transmit Multicast/Broadcast over a Single Frequency Network (MBSFN), where a time-synchronized common waveform is transmitted from multiple cells for a given duration. MBSFN transmission enables highly efficient MBMS, allowing for over-the-air combining of multi-cell transmissions in the UE, where the cyclic prefix is utilized to cover the difference in the propagation delays, which makes the MBSFN transmission appear to the UE as a transmission from a single large cell. Transmission on a dedicated carrier for MBSFN with the possibility to use a longer CP with a sub-carrier bandwidth of 7.5kHz is supported as well as transmission of MBSFN on a carrier with both MBMS transmissions and point-to-point transmissions using time division multiplexing.
Transmission with multiple input and multiple output antennas (MIMO) are supported with configurations in the downlink with two or four transmit antennas and two or four receive antennas, which allow for multi-layer transmissions with up to four streams. Multi-user MIMO i.e. allocation of different streams to different users is supported in both UL and DL. MIMO24244
4.2.2

Physical channels and modulation

the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), the Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH), the Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH), the Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH), the Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH)
The physical channels defined in the downlink are:
MBMSLTE MBMSMBSFN cell MBSFNMBMSUE cellCP MBSFNUE cell

7.5KHzMBSFN MBMS
PDSCH PMCH and the Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH). PDCCH PBCH The physical channels defined in the uplink are: PCFICH PHICH HARQ the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH),
the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), and the Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH).
PRACH PUSCH PUCCH
In addition, signals are defined as reference signals, primary and secondary synchronization signals. The modulation schemes supported in the downlink and uplink are QPSK, 16QAM and 64QAM.
4.2.3
Turbo1/3 The channel coding scheme for transport blocks in LTE is Turbo Coding with a coding rate of R=1/3, two 8-state constituent encoders and a contention-free quadratic permutation polynomial (QPP) turbo code internal interleaver. Trellis termination is used for the turbo coding. Before the turbo coding, transport blocks are segmented into byte aligned segments with a maximum information block size of 6144 bits. Error detection is supported by the use of 24 bit CRC. Further channel coding schemes for BCH and control information are specified in [3].
Channel coding and interleaving
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
4.2.4
Physical layer procedures
There are several Physical layer procedures involved with LTE operation. Such procedures covered by the physical layer are; Cell search - Power control - Uplink synchronisation and Uplink timing control - Random access related procedures - HARQ related procedures HARQ Through the control of physical layer resources in the frequency domain as well as in the time and power domain, implicit support of interference coordination is provided in LTE.
4.2.5
Physical layer measurements
Radio characteristics are measured by the UE and the eNode-B and reported to higher layers in the network. These include, e.g. measurements for intra- and inter-frequency handover, inter RAT handover, timing measurements and measurements for RRM. UEeNode-B Measurements for inter-RAT handover are defined in support of handover to GSM, UTRA FDD and UTRA TDD.
5
5.1
Document structure of LTE physical layer specification

Overview
The physical layer specification consists of a general document (TS 36.201), and four documents (TS 36.211 through 36.214). The relation between the physical layer specifications in the context of the higher layers is shown in Figure 2.
To/From Higher Layers
36.212
Multiplexing and channel coding
36.211
Physical Channels and Modulation
36.213
Physical layer procedures
36.214
Physical layer Measurements
Figure 2: Relation between Physical Layer specifications
5.2
TS 36.201: Physical layer General description
The scope is to describe:
3GPP
Release 8T
10
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
The contents of the Layer 1 documents (TS 36.200 series); Where to find information; A general description of LTE Layer 1.
5.3
TS 36.211: Physical channels and modulation
The scope of this specification is to establish the characteristics of the Layer-1 physical channels, generation of physical layer signals and modulation, and to specify: Definition of the uplink and downlink physical channels; The structure of the physical channels, frame format, physical resource elements, etc.; Modulation mapping (BPSK, QPSK, etc); Physical shared channel in uplink and downlink; Reference signal in uplink and downlink; Random access channel; Primary and secondary synchronization signals; OFDM signal generation in downlink; SC-FDMA signal generation in uplink; Scrambling, modulation and up conversion; Uplink-downlink timing relation Layer mapping and precoding in downlink.
5.4
TS 36.212: Multiplexing and channel coding
The scope of this specification is to describe the transport channel and control channel data processing, including multiplexing, channel coding and interleaving, and to specify: Channel coding schemes; Coding of Layer 1 / Layer 2 control information; Interleaving; Rate matching;
5.5
-
TS 36.213: Physical layer procedures

Synchronisation procedures, including cell search procedure and timing synchronisation; Power control procedure; Random access procedure; Physical downlink shared channel related procedures, including CQI reporting and MIMO feedback; Physical uplink shared channel related procedures, including UE sounding and HARQ ACK/NACK detection; Physical shared control channel procedures, including assignment of shared control channels.
The scope of this specification is to establish the characteristics of the physical layer procedures, and to specify:
3GPP
Release 8T
11
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
5.6
-
TS 36.214: Physical layer Measurements

Measurements to be performed by Layer 1 in UE and E-UTRAN; Reporting of measurement results to higher layers and the network; Handover measurements, idle-mode measurements, etc.
The scope of this specification is to establish the characteristics of the physical layer measurements, and to specify:
3GPP
Release 8T
12
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
Annex A (informative): Preferred mathematical notations

The following table contains the preferred mathematical notations used in L1 documentation.
item multiply product matrix product scalar product (product of a matrix by a scalar) matrix dimensioning Kronecker product bracketing of sets (all elements of same type, not ordered elements) bracketing of lists (all elements not necessary of same type, ordered elements) bracketing of sequences (all elements of same type, ordered elements) bracketing of function argument bracketing of array index bracketing of matrix or vector Separation of indexes use of italic for symbols bracketing of arithmetic expression to force precedence of operations necessity of bracketing arithmetic expressions number type
notation cross sign, e.g. ab dot sign, e.g. ab dot sign, scalar should precede matrix e.g.
(1 + j )
u v
number of rows number of column, e.g.: RC ab curly brackets {}, e.g. {a1, a2, ,ap}, or
{ai }i{1, 2,, p}

ai
round brackets (), e.g. (A, u, x) angle brackets, e.g. <a1, a2, ,ap> or
i{1, 2 ,, p }
round brackets, e.g. f(x) square brackets, e.g. a[x] square brackets [], e.g.
x y , [x
1 1 y ] , or 1 1
use a comma : e.g. Ni,j a symbol should be either in italic or in normal font, but mixing up should be avoided. round brackets : e.g.
(a + b) c
binary xor and and
matrix or vector transpose 11 matrices vector dot product complex conjugate matrix or vector Hermitian transpose real part and imaginary part of complex numbers.
When only + and bracketing is not necessary. When the mod operator is used explicit bracketing of mod operands and possibly result should be done. in a context of non negative integer numbers, some notes should stress when a number is signed, or possibly fractional. respectively use + or . If no "mod 2" is explicitly in the expression some text should stress that the operation is modulo 2. vT implicitly cast to its unique element. uTv for column vectors, and uvT for line vectors v* vH Re(x) and Im(x)
3GPP
Release 8T
13
3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)
Annex B (informative): Change history

Change history
Date 02/10/06 13/10/06 01/11/06 04/11/06 05/02/07 20/02/07 26/02/07 26/02/07 03/03/07 01/05/07 11/05/07 11/05/07 21/06/07 11/05/07 04/09/07 07/09/07 10/09/07 12/09/07 28/11/07 TSG # RAN#35 RAN#37 RAN_37 RAN_38 TSG Doc. CR Rev Subject/Comment Draft version created Endorsed by RAN1 Editors version at RAN1#47 Revised editors version at RAN1#47 Editors version at RAN1#48 Endorsed by RAN1#48 Editors version after RAN1#48 Editors version after RAN1#48 RP-070168 For information at RAN#35 Editors version at RAN1#49 Editors version at RAN1#49 Endorsed by RAN1#49 Editors version after RAN1#49 Endorsed by RAN1#49bis Editors version after RAN1#50 Editors version after RAN1#50 RP-070728 For approval at RAN#37 RP-070728 Approved version RP-070949 0001 1 Alignment of 36.201 with other LTE L1 specifications Old 0.0.1 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 2.0.0 8.0.0 New 0.0.0 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.1.2 0.2.1 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 2.0.0 8.0.0 8.1.0
3GPP
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Channels and Modulation (Release 8)
The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organizational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organizational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification. Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organizational Partners' Publications Offices.
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Keywords
3GPP Postal address

650 Route des Lucioles - Sophia Antipolis Valbonne - FRANCE Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16
Internet
http://www.3gpp.org
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Contents
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................6 1 2 3
3.1 3.2
Scope .......................................................................................................................................................7 References ................................................................................................................................................7 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................7

Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 7 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 9
4
4.1 4.2
Frame structure.........................................................................................................................................9
Frame structure type 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Frame structure type 2 ....................................................................................................................................... 9
5
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.1.1
Uplink.....................................................................................................................................................11
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 11 Physical channels ....................................................................................................................................... 11 Physical signals .......................................................................................................................................... 11 Slot structure and physical resources ............................................................................................................... 11 Resource grid ............................................................................................................................................. 11 Resource elements...................................................................................................................................... 12 Resource blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 12 Physical uplink shared channel........................................................................................................................ 13 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 13 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 13 Transform precoding.................................................................................................................................. 14 Mapping to physical resources ................................................................................................................... 14 Physical uplink control channel ....................................................................................................................... 15 PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b..................................................................................................................... 15 PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b..................................................................................................................... 17 Mapping to physical resources ................................................................................................................... 18 Reference signals ............................................................................................................................................. 19 Generation of the reference signal sequence .............................................................................................. 19 RB Base sequences of length 3N sc or larger............................................................................................ 19
RB 5.5.1.2 Base sequences of length less than 3N sc ........................................................................................... 20 5.5.1.3 Group hopping...................................................................................................................................... 21 5.5.1.4 Sequence hopping................................................................................................................................. 22 5.5.2 Demodulation reference signal................................................................................................................... 22 5.5.2.1 Demodulation reference signal for PUSCH.......................................................................................... 22 5.5.2.1.1 Reference signal sequence .............................................................................................................. 22 5.5.2.1.2 Mapping to physical resources........................................................................................................ 23 5.5.2.2 Demodulation reference signal for PUCCH ......................................................................................... 23 5.5.2.2.1 Reference signal sequence .............................................................................................................. 23 5.5.2.2.2 Mapping to physical resources........................................................................................................ 24 5.5.3 Sounding reference signal .......................................................................................................................... 24 5.5.3.1 Sequence generation ............................................................................................................................. 24 5.5.3.2 Mapping to physical resources ............................................................................................................. 25 5.6 SC-FDMA baseband signal generation............................................................................................................ 25 5.7 Physical random access channel ...................................................................................................................... 25 5.7.1 Time and frequency structure..................................................................................................................... 25 5.7.2 Preamble sequence generation ................................................................................................................... 26 5.7.3 Baseband signal generation........................................................................................................................ 30 5.8 Modulation and upconversion.......................................................................................................................... 30
6
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2
Downlink................................................................................................................................................31
Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 31 Physical channels ....................................................................................................................................... 31 Physical signals .......................................................................................................................................... 31
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.3.1 6.3.3.2 6.3.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.4.1 6.3.4.2 6.3.4.2.1 6.3.4.2.2 6.3.4.2.3 6.3.4.3 6.3.5 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3 6.7.4 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.8.4 6.8.5 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 6.9.3 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.2 6.10.2 6.10.2.1 6.10.2.2 6.10.3 6.10.3.1 6.10.3.2 6.11 6.11.1 6.11.1.1 6.11.1.2 6.11.2 6.11.2.1 6.11.2.2 6.12
Slot structure and physical resource elements ................................................................................................. 32 Resource grid ............................................................................................................................................. 32 Resource elements...................................................................................................................................... 32 Resource blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 33 Resource-element groups ........................................................................................................................... 34 Guard period for half-duplex FDD operation............................................................................................. 35 Guard Period for TDD Operation............................................................................................................... 35 General structure for downlink physical channels ........................................................................................... 35 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 35 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 36 Layer mapping ........................................................................................................................................... 36 Layer mapping for transmission on a single antenna port .................................................................... 36 Layer mapping for spatial multiplexing ............................................................................................... 36 Layer mapping for transmit diversity ................................................................................................... 37 Precoding ................................................................................................................................................... 37 Precoding for transmission on a single antenna port ............................................................................ 37 Precoding for spatial multiplexing........................................................................................................ 37 Precoding for zero and small-delay CDD ....................................................................................... 37 Precoding for large delay CDD....................................................................................................... 38 Codebook for precoding ................................................................................................................. 39 Precoding for transmit diversity ........................................................................................................... 40 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 41 Physical downlink shared channel ................................................................................................................... 41 Physical multicast channel............................................................................................................................... 41 Physical broadcast channel .............................................................................................................................. 42 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 42 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 42 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 42 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 42 Physical control format indicator channel ....................................................................................................... 43 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 43 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 43 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 43 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 43 Physical downlink control channel .................................................................................................................. 44 PDCCH formats ......................................................................................................................................... 44 PDCCH multiplexing and scrambling........................................................................................................ 44 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 45 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 45 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 45 Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel........................................................................................................... 46 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 46 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 47 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 49 Reference signals ............................................................................................................................................. 50 Cell-specific reference signals ................................................................................................................... 50 Sequence generation ............................................................................................................................. 51 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 51 MBSFN reference signals .......................................................................................................................... 53 Sequence generation ............................................................................................................................. 53 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 53 UE-specific reference signals..................................................................................................................... 55 Sequence generation ............................................................................................................................. 55 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 56 Synchronization signals ................................................................................................................................... 57 Primary synchronization signal .................................................................................................................. 57 Sequence generation ............................................................................................................................. 57 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 57 Secondary synchronization signal .............................................................................................................. 58 Sequence generation ............................................................................................................................. 58 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 59 OFDM baseband signal generation.................................................................................................................. 60
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.13
Modulation and upconversion.......................................................................................................................... 61
7
7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.2
Generic functions ...................................................................................................................................61

Modulation mapper.......................................................................................................................................... 61 BPSK ............................................................................................................................................................... 61 QPSK ............................................................................................................................................................... 62 16QAM............................................................................................................................................................ 62 64QAM............................................................................................................................................................ 62 Pseudo-random sequence generation ............................................................................................................... 63
8
8.1
Timing ....................................................................................................................................................64
Uplink-downlink frame timing ........................................................................................................................ 64
Annex A (informative):
Change history ...............................................................................................64
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Foreword
This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows: Version x.y.z where: x the first digit: 1 presented to TSG for information; 2 presented to TSG for approval; 3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control. y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc. z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Scope
The present document describes the physical channels for evolved UTRA.
References
References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or non-specific. For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply. For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same Release as the present document.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications". 3GPP TS 36.201: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer General Description". 3GPP TS 36.212: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding". 3GPP TS 36.213: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures". 3GPP TS 36.214: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer Measurements". 3GPP TS 36.104: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission and reception.
3
3.1
(k , l )
( p) ak ,l

Symbols
Resource element with frequency-domain index k and time-domain index l
kl
For the purposes of the present document, the following symbols apply:
Value of resource element (k , l ) [for antenna port p ] Matrix for supporting cyclic delay diversity Carrier frequency
bit
D f0
PUSCH M sc
PUSCH M RB (q) M bit (q) M symb
Scheduled bandwidth for uplink transmission, expressed as a number of subcarriers Scheduled bandwidth for uplink transmission, expressed as a number of resource blocks Number of coded bits to transmit on a physical channel [for code word q ]
Number of modulation symbols to transmit on a physical channel [for code word q ]
3GPP
Release 8
layer M symb
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Number of modulation symbols to transmit per layer for a physical channel

ap M symb
Number of modulation symbols to transmit per antenna port for a physical channel
N N CP,l
(1) N cs (2) N RB PUCCH N RB cell N ID MBSFN N ID DL N RB min, DL N RB max, DL N RB UL N RB min, UL N RB max, UL N RB DL N symb UL N symb RB N sc PUCCH N RS
FFT15kHzN=20487.5kHzN=4096 OFDMl
A constant equal to 2048 for f = 15 kHz and 4096 for f = 7.5 kHz Downlink cyclic prefix length for OFDM symbol l in a slot
Number of cyclic shifts used for PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b in a resource block with a mix of formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b RB Bandwidth reserved for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b, expressed in multiples of N sc Number of resource blocks in a slot used for PUCCH transmission (set by higher layers) Physical layer cell identity MBSFN area identity
RB Downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of N sc RB Smallest downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of N sc RB Largest downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of N sc RB Uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of N sc RB Smallest uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of N sc RB Largest uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of N sc
Number of OFDM symbols in a downlink slot Number of SC-FDMA symbols in an uplink slot Resource block size in the frequency domain, expressed as a number of subcarriers Number of reference symbols per slot for PUCCH Timing offset between uplink and downlink radio frames at the UE, expressed in units of Ts Resource index for PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b Resource index for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b Number of PDCCHs present in a subframe Physical resource block number Virtual resource block number Radio network temporary identifier System frame number Slot number within a radio frame Number of cell-specific antenna ports Antenna port number Code word number Time-continuous baseband signal for antenna port p and OFDM symbol l in a slot Radio frame duration Basic time unit Slot duration Precoding matrix for downlink spatial multiplexing Amplitude scaling for PRACH Amplitude scaling for PUCCH Amplitude scaling for PUSCH Amplitude scaling for sounding reference symbols Subcarrier spacing Subcarrier spacing for the random access preamble Number of transmission layers
N TA
(1) nPUCCH ( 2) nPUCCH
nPDCCH nPRB nVRB nRNTI nf ns P p q sl( p ) (t ) Tf Ts Tslot W
PRACH PUCCH PUSCH SRS

f f RA
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
3.2
CCE CDD PBCH PCFICH PDCCH PDSCH PHICH PMCH PRACH PUCCH PUSCH
Abbreviations
Control Channel Element Cyclic Delay Diversity Physical broadcast channel Physical control format indicator channel Physical downlink control channel Physical downlink shared channel Physical hybrid-ARQ indicator channel Physical multicast channel Physical random access channel Physical uplink control channel Physical uplink shared channel
For the purposes of the present document, the following abbreviations apply:
Frame structure
Throughout this specification, unless otherwise noted, the size of various fields in the time domain is expressed as a number of time units Ts = 1 (15000 2048) seconds. Downlink and uplink transmissions are organized into radio frames with Tf = 307200 Ts = 10 ms duration. Two radio frame structures are supported: Type 1, applicable to FDD, Type 2, applicable to TDD.
4.1
Frame structure type 1
Frame structure type 1 is applicable to both full duplex and half duplex FDD. Each radio frame is Tf = 307200 Ts = 10 ms long and consists of 20 slots of length Tslot = 15360 Ts = 0.5 ms , numbered from 0 to 19. A subframe is defined as two consecutive slots where subframe i consists of slots 2i and 2i + 1 . For FDD, 10 subframes are available for downlink transmission and 10 subframes are available for uplink transmissions in each 10 ms interval. Uplink and downlink transmissions are separated in the frequency domain. In half-duplex FDD operation, the UE cannot transmit and receive at the same time while there are no such restrictions in full-duplex FDD.
Figure 4.1-1: Frame structure type 1.
4.2
Frame structure type 2
Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. Each radio frame of length Tf = 307200 Ts = 10 ms consists of two halfframes of length Tf = 153600 Ts = 5 ms each. Each half-frame consists of eight slots of length Tslot = 15360 Ts = 0.5 ms and three special fields, DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS. The length of DwPTS and UpPTS is given by Table 4.2-1 subject to the total length of DwPTS, GP and UpPTS being equal to 30720 Ts = 1 ms . Subframe 1 in all
3GPP
Release 8
10
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
configurations and subframe 6 in configurations 0, 1, 2 and 6 in Table 4.2-2 consists of DwPTS, GP and UpPTS. All other subframes are defined as two slots where subframe i consists of slots 2i and 2i + 1 . Subframes 0 and 5 and DwPTS are always reserved for downlink transmission. The supported uplink-downlink allocations are listed in Table 4.2-2 where, for each subframe in a radio frame, D denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions, U denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and S denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS, GP and UpPTS. Both 5 ms and 10 ms switch-point periodicity is supported. In case of 5 ms switch-point periodicity, UpPTS and subframes 2 and 7 are reserved for uplink transmission. In case of 10 ms switch-point periodicity, DwPTS exist in both half-frames while GP and UpPTS only exist in the first half-frame and DwPTS in the second half-frame has a length equal to 30720Ts = 1 ms . UpPTS and subframe 2 are reserved for uplink transmission and subframes 7 to 9 are reserved for downlink transmission.
Figure 4.2-1: Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity).
Table 4.2-1: Lengths of DwPTS/GP/UpPTS.

Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Normal cyclic prefix DwPTS GP UpPTS Extended cyclic prefix DwPTS GP UpPTS
6592 Ts 19760 Ts 21952 Ts 24144 Ts 26336 Ts 6592 Ts 19760 Ts 21952 Ts 24144 Ts
21936 Ts 8768 Ts 6576 Ts 4384 Ts 2192 Ts 19744 Ts 6576 Ts 4384 Ts 2192 Ts 4384 Ts 2192 Ts
7680 Ts 20480 Ts 23040 Ts 25600 Ts 7680 Ts 20480 Ts 23040 Ts

-
20480 Ts 7680 Ts 5120 Ts 2560 Ts 17920 Ts 5120 Ts 2560 Ts

-
2560 Ts
5120 Ts
3GPP
Release 8
11
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 4.2-2: Uplink-downlink allocations.

Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Switch-point periodicity 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 0 D D D D D D D 1 S S S S S S S 2 U U U U U U U Subframe number 3 4 5 6 7 U U D S U U D D S U D D D S U U U D D D U D D D D D D D D D U U D S U 8 U U D D D D U 9 U D D D D D D
5
5.1
5.1.1
Uplink
Overview
Physical channels
The smallest resource unit for uplink transmissions is denoted a resource element and is defined in section 5.2.2.
An uplink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers and is the interface defined between 36.212 and 36.211. The following uplink physical channels are defined: Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH Physical Uplink Control Channel, PUCCH Physical Random Access Channel, PRACH
5.1.2
Physical signals
An uplink physical signal is used by the physical layer but does not carry information originating from higher layers. The following uplink physical signals are defined: Reference signal
5.2
5.2.1
Slot structure and physical resources

Resource grid
UL RB UL The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of N RB N sc subcarriers and N symb SC-FDMA UL symbols. The resource grid is illustrated in Figure 5.2.1-1. The quantity N RB depends on the uplink transmission bandwidth configured in the cell and shall fulfil min, UL UL max, UL N RB N RB N RB min, UL max, UL = 6 and N RB = 110 is the smallest and largest uplink bandwidth, respectively, supported by the where N RB UL is given by [6]. current version of this specification. The set of allowed values for N RB
The number of SC-FDMA symbols in a slot depends on the cyclic prefix length configured by higher layers and is given in Table 5.2.3-1.
3GPP
Release 8
12
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Tslot
UL N symb
UL RB k = N RB N sc 1
UL RB N symb N sc
UL RB N RB N sc
(k , l )
RB N sc
k =0
l=0
l=
UL N symb
Figure 5.2.1-1: Uplink resource grid.
5.2.2
Resource elements
Each element in the resource grid is called a resource element and is uniquely defined by the index pair (k , l ) in a slot
UL RB UL N sc 1 and l = 0,..., N symb 1 are the indices in the frequency and time domain, respectively. where k = 0,..., N RB
Resource element (k , l ) corresponds to the complex value ak ,l . Quantities ak ,l corresponding to resource elements not used for transmission of a physical channel or a physical signal in a slot shall be set to zero.
5.2.3
Resource blocks
UL A physical resource block is defined as N symb consecutive SC-FDMA symbols in the time domain and
RB UL RB N sc consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain, where N symb and N sc are given by Table 5.2.3-1. A physical UL RB resource block in the uplink thus consists of N symb N sc resource elements, corresponding to one slot in the time
domain and 180 kHz in the frequency domain.
3GPP
Release 8
13
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.2.3-1: Resource block parameters.

Configuration Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix
RB N sc UL N symb
12 12
7 6
The relation between the physical resource block number nPRB in the frequency domain and resource elements (k , l ) in a slot is given by
k nPRB = RB N sc
5.3
-
Physical uplink shared channel

scrambling modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols mapping of complex-valued symbols to resource elements generation of complex-valued time-domain SC-FDMA signal for each antenna port
The baseband signal representing the physical uplink shared channel is defined in terms of the following steps:
Figure 5.3-1: Overview of uplink physical channel processing.
5.3.1
Scrambling
The block of bits b(0),..., b( M bit 1) , where M bit is the number of bits transmitted on the physical uplink shared channel in one subframe, shall be scrambled with a UE-specific scrambling sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a ~ ~ block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b ( M bit 1) according to
~ b (i ) = (b(i ) + c(i ) ) mod 2
where the scrambling sequence c(i ) is given by Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised
cell at the start of each subframe. with cinit = nRNTI 214 + ns 2 2 9 + N ID
5.3.2
Modulation
~ ~ The block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b ( M bit 1) shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) . Table 5.3.2-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the
physical uplink shared channel. Table 5.3.2-1: Uplink modulation schemes

Physical channel PUSCH Modulation schemes QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
3GPP
Release 8
14
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.3.3
Transform precoding
PUSCH The block of complex-valued symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) is divided into M symb M sc sets, each corresponding
to one SC-FDMA symbol. Transform precoding shall be applied according to

PUSCH z (l M sc
+ k) =
1
PUSCH M sc
PUSCH M sc 1
i =0
PUSCH d (l M sc
+ i )e
2ik PUSCH M sc
PUSCH k = 0,..., M sc 1 PUSCH l = 0,..., M symb M sc 1 PUSCH PUSCH UL = M RB N RB resulting in a block of complex-valued symbols z (0),..., z ( M symb 1) . The variable M sc , where PUSCH M RB represents the bandwidth of the PUSCH in terms of resource blocks, and shall fulfil PUSCH UL M RB = 2 2 3 3 5 5 N RB
where 2 , 3 , 5 is a set of non-negative integers.
5.3.4
Mapping to physical resources
The block of complex-valued symbols z (0),..., z ( M symb 1) shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor The mapping to resource elements (k , l ) corresponding to the physical resource blocks assigned for transmission and not used for transmission of reference signals shall be in increasing order of first the index k , then the index l , starting with the first slot in the subframe. If uplink frequency-hopping is disabled or the hopping is included in the uplink scheduling grant, the set of physical resource blocks to be used for transmission are given by nPRB = nVRB where nVRB is obtained from the uplink scheduling grant as described in [4]. If uplink frequency-hopping with predefined hopping pattern is enabled, the set of physical resource blocks to be used for transmission in slot ns is given by the scheduling grant together with a predefined pattern according to
sb sb sb sb ~ (n ) = n ~ ~ n PRB s VRB + f hop (i ) N RB + N RB 1 2 nVRB mod N RB f m (i ) mod N RB N sb
PUSCH and mapped in sequence starting with z (0) to physical resource blocks assigned for transmission of PUSCH.
((
) (
))
10 nx + ns 2 inter subframe hopping i= intra subframe hopping 20 nx + ns ~ (n ) + N PUCCH 2 nPRB (ns ) = n PRB s RB ~ =n N PUCCH 2 n
VRB VRB RB
where nVRB is obtained from the scheduling grant as described in [4]. The number of resource blocks in a slot used for
PUCCH sb , is configured by higher layers. The size N RB of each sub-band is given by PUCCH transmission, N RB sb UL PUCCH N RB = N RB N RB N sb , where the number of sub-bands N sb is given by higher layers. The function
f m (i ) {0,1} determines whether mirroring is used or not.
The hopping function f hop (i ) is given by

if i < K f cs (i ) f hop (i ) = sb f hop (i K ) + f cs (i ) mod N RB otherwise inter subframe hopping 8 K = 15 ( 1 ) 1 intra n + subframe hopping s
3GPP
Release 8
15
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
where f cs (i ) { 1,2,..., N sb 1} .
5.4
Physical uplink control channel
The physical uplink control channel, PUCCH, carries uplink control information. The PUCCH is never transmitted simultaneously with the PUSCH from the same UE. For frame structure type 2, the PUCCH is not transmitted in the UpPTS field. The physical uplink control channel supports multiple formats as shown in Table 5.4-1. Formats 2a and 2b are supported for normal cyclic prefix only. Table 5.4-1: Supported PUCCH formats.
PUCCH format 1 1a 1b 2 2a 2b Modulation scheme N/A BPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK+BPSK QPSK+QPSK Number of bits per subframe, M bit N/A 1 2 20 21 22
cell All PUCCH formats use a cyclic shift of a sequence in each symbol, where ncs (ns , l ) is used to derive the cyclic shift cell (ns , l ) varies with the symbol number l and the slot number ns for the different PUCCH formats. The quantity ncs according to
cell ncs (ns , l ) =
3 i =0
UL c(4 N symb ns + 4l + i ) 2 i
where the pseudo-random sequence c(i ) is defined by section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be
cell at the beginning of each radio frame. initialized with cinit = f N ID (2) (1) and N cs , given by higher layers. The The physical resources used for PUCCH depends on two parameters, N RB (1) {0,1,...,8} and denotes the number of cyclic shift used for PUCCH formats transmission in each slot. The variable N cs 1/1a/1b in a resource block used for a mix of formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b. At most one resource block in each slot supports a mix of formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b. Resources used for transmission of PUCCH format 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b (1) (2) (2) RB RB (1) < N RB N sc + ( N sc N cs 2) , respectively. are represented by the non-negative indices nPUCCH and nPUCCH (2) 0 denotes the bandwidth in terms of resource blocks that are reserved for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b variable N RB
5.4.1
PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b
For PUCCH format 1, information is carried by the presence/absence of transmission of PUCCH from the UE. In the remainder of this section, d (0) = 1 shall be assumed for PUCCH format 1. For PUCCH formats 1a and 1b, one or two explicit bits are transmitted, respectively. The block of bits b(0),..., b( M bit 1) shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a complex-valued symbol d (0) . The modulation schemes for the different PUCCH formats are given by Table 5.4-1.
PUCCH ) The complex-valued symbol d (0) shall be multiplied with a cyclically shifted length N seq = 12 sequence ru( ,v ( n)
according to
) y (n) = d (0) ru(, v ( n), PUCCH n = 0,1,..., N seq
) RS PUCCH where ru(, . The cyclic shift varies between symbols and slots as v ( n) is defined by section 5.5.1 with M sc = N seq
defined below.
3GPP
Release 8
16
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
PUCCH The block of complex-valued symbols y (0),..., y ( N seq 1) shall be block-wise spread with the orthogonal sequence
wnoc (i ) according to
PUCCH PUCCH PUCCH z m'N SF N seq + m N seq + n = wnoc (m) y (n )
where
PUCCH 1 m = 0,..., N SF PUCCH 1 n = 0,..., N seq
m' = 0,1
PUCCH = 4 . The sequence wnoc (i ) is given by Table 5.4.1-1. with N SF (1) Resources used for transmission of PUCCH format 1, 1a and 1b are identified by a resource index nPUCCH from which the orthogonal sequence index noc (ns ) and the cyclic shift (ns ) are determined according to
n(n ) PUCCH N s shift noc (ns )= N 2 n (ns ) PUCCH shift
for normal cyclic prefix
for extended cyclic prefix
RB (ns )= 2 ncs (ns ) N sc
n cell (n , l ) + n(n ) PUCCH + PUCCH + n (n ) mod PUCCH mod N mod N RB cs s s shift offset oc s shift sc ncs (ns )= cell PUCCH PUCCH RB n (n , l ) + n(ns ) shift + offset + noc (ns ) 2 mod N mod N sc cs s
[ [
( (
))
for normal cyclic prefix for extended cyclic prefix
where
(1) (1) (1) if nPUCCH < c N cs PUCCH N shift N = cs RB N sc otherwise 3 normal cyclic prefix c= 2 extended cyclic prefix
The resource indices within the two resource blocks in the two slots of a subframe to which the PUCCH is mapped are given by
n n(ns ) = PUCCH (1) (1) PUCCH RB PUCCH nPUCCH c N cs shift mod c N sc shift
(1)
) (
)
(1) (1) < c N cs PUCCH if nPUCCH shift
otherwise
for ns mod 2 = 0 and by

(1) RB PUCCH (1) PUCCH [3(n(ns 1) + 1)] mod 3 N sc shift + 1 1 for normal cyclic prefix and nPUCCH c N cs shift n(ns ) = n(ns 1) otherwise
for ns mod 2 = 1 . The quantities

[1],2,3} for normal cyclic prefix { PUCCH shift for extended cyclic prefix {2,3}
PUCCH offset 0,1,..., PUCCH 1 shift
3GPP
Release 8
17
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
are set by higher layers.
PUCCH Table 5.4.1-1: Orthogonal sequences w(0) w( N SF 1)
for PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b.
Sequence index noc (ns ) 0 1 2
PUCCH 1) Orthogonal sequences w(0) w( N SF
[+ 1 [+ 1 [+ 1
+ 1 + 1 + 1] 1 + 1 1] 1 1 + 1]
5.4.2
PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b
The block of bits b(0),..., b( M bit 1) shall be scrambled with a UE-specific scrambling sequence, resulting in a block of ~ ~ scrambled bits b (0),..., b ( M bit 1) according to
~ b (i ) = (b(i ) + c(i ) ) mod 2
cell at the start of each subframe. with cinit = nRNTI 214 + ns 2 2 9 + N ID
~ ~ The block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b (19) shall be QPSK modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),..., d (9) .
PUCCH = 12 sequence Each complex-valued symbol d (0),..., d (9) shall be multiplied with a cyclically shifted length N seq ) ru(, v ( n) according to PUCCH ) n + i ) = d (n) ru(, z ( N seq v (i )
n = 0,1,...,9
RB i = 0,1,..., N sc 1 ) RS PUCCH where ru(, . v (i ) is defined by section 5.5.1 with M sc = N seq (2) from which the Resources used for transmission of PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b are identified by a resource index nPUCCH cyclic shift is determined according to RB (ns ) = 2 ncs (ns ) N sc
where
(2) cell RB n (ns , l ) + nPUCCH mod N sc ncs (ns ) = cs (2) (2) cell RB ncs (ns , l ) + nPUCCH + N RB + 1 mod N sc
( (
( 2) RB (2) N RB < N sc if nPUCCH otherwise
for ns mod 2 = 0 and by

( 2) RB RB (2) N RB + 1 1 if nPUCCH < N sc N RB (n (n 1) + 1) mod N sc ncs (ns ) = sc cs s n n ( 1 ) otherwise cs s
] (
3GPP
Release 8
18
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
for ns mod 2 = 1 . For PUCCH formats 2a and 2b, supported for normal cyclic prefix only, the bit(s) b(20),..., b( M bit 1) shall be modulated as described in Table 5.4.2-1 resulting in a single modulation symbol d (10) used in the generation of the reference-signal for PUCCH format 2a and 2b as described in Section 5.5.2.2.1.
Table 5.4.2-1: Modulation symbol d (10) for PUCCH formats 2a and 2b.
PUCCH format 2a
b(20),..., b( M bit 1)
0 1 00 01 10 11
2b
d (10) 1 1 1 j j 1
5.4.3
The block of complex-valued symbols z (i ) shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor PUCCH and mapped in sequence starting with z (0) to resource elements. PUCCH uses one resource block in each of the two slots in a subframe. Within the physical resource block used for transmission, the mapping of z (i ) to resource elements (k , l ) not used for transmission of reference signals shall be in increasing order of first k , then l and finally the slot number, starting with the first slot in the subframe. The physical resource blocks to be used for transmission of PUCCH in slot ns is given by
m 2 = N UL 1 m 2 RB if (m + ns mod 2 ) mod 2 = 0 if (m + ns mod 2 ) mod 2 = 1
nPRB
where the variable m depends on the PUCCH format. For formats 1, 1a and 1b
(1) (1) N (2) if nPUCCH < c N cs PUCCH shift RB (1) (1) PUCCH m = n (2) PUCCH c N cs shift + N RB + 1 otherwise RB PUCCH c N sc shift
3 normal cyclic prefix c= 2 extended cyclic prefix
and for formats 2, 2a and 2b

(2) RB m = nPUCCH N sc
Mapping of modulation symbols for the physical uplink control channel is illustrated in Figure 5.4.3-1. In case of simultaneous transmission of sounding reference signal and PUCCH format 1a or 1b, one SC-FDMA symbol on PUCCH shall punctured.
3GPP
Release 8
UL nPRB = N RB 1
19
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
m =1 m=3
m=0 m=2
nPRB = 0
m=2 m=0
m=3 m =1
One subframe Figure 5.4.3-1: Mapping to physical resource blocks for PUCCH.
5.5
-
Reference signals
Demodulation reference signal, associated with transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH Sounding reference signal, not associated with transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH
Two types of uplink reference signals are supported:
The same set of base sequences is used for demodulation and sounding reference signals.
5.5.1
Generation of the reference signal sequence
) Reference signal sequence ru( ,v ( n) is defined by a cyclic shift of a base sequence ru ,v ( n) according to ) RS jn ru(, ru ,v (n), 0 n < M sc v ( n) = e RS RB max, UL = mN sc is the length of the reference signal sequence and 1 m N RB . Multiple reference signal where M sc sequences are defined from a single base sequence through different values of .
Base sequences ru ,v (n) are divided into groups, where u {0,1,...,29} is the group number and v is the base sequence
RS RB = mN sc number within the group, such that each group contains one base sequence ( v = 0 ) of each length M sc , RS RB max, UL 1 m 5 and two base sequences ( v = 0,1 ) of each length M sc = mN sc , 6 m N RB . The sequence group number u and the number v within the group may vary in time as described in Sections 5.5.1.3 and 5.5.1.4, RS respectively.The definition of the base sequence ru ,v (0),..., ru ,v ( M sc 1) depends on the sequence length M sc . RS
5.5.1.1
RB Base sequences of length 3N sc or larger
RS RB RS For M sc 3 N sc , the base sequence ru ,v (0),..., ru ,v ( M sc 1) is given by RS RS ru ,v (n) = xq (n mod N ZC ), 0 n < M sc
where the q th root Zadoff-Chu sequence is defined by

xq (m ) = e
j
qm ( m +1)
RS N ZC
RS , 0 m N ZC 1
with q given by
3GPP
Release 8
20
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
q = q + 1 2 + v (1) 2 q
RS q = N ZC (u + 1) 31 RS RS RS of the Zadoff-Chu sequence is given by the largest prime number such that N ZC < M sc . The length N ZC
5.5.1.2
RB Base sequences of length less than 3N sc
RS RB RS RB For M sc = N sc and M sc = 2 N sc , base sequence is given by RS ru ,v (n) = e j ( n ) 4 , 0 n M sc 1 RS RB RS RB = N sc and M sc = 2 N sc , where the value of ( n) is given by Table 5.5.1.2-1 and Table 5.5.1.2-2 for M sc respectively. RS RB Table 5.5.1.2-1: Definition of (n) for M sc = N sc .
u
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 -1 -3 1 1 -1 3 1 3 -3 3 1 -3 -3 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 1 -3 -1 3 1 1 1 1 3 -3 3 -1 -3 -3 3 1 -3 3 1 -1 3 1 3 3 -3 3 1 1 1 -3 3 -1 3 -3 3 3 -3 1 1 3 -3 -1 3 -1 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 -3 -1 3 3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 3 -3 1 -1 -1 -3 -1 1 3 1 -1 1 3 -3 -3 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -3 -3 1 3 -3 -1 3 -1
(0),..., (11)
3 3 -3 1 1 -1 -3 1 -1 3 1 3 -3 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -3 1 1 -3 -3 -1 3 1 3 -3 -1 -1 3 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 3 -3 -1 -1 -3 3 1 1 3 -1 3 3 1 -1 1 -3 -3 -3 3 3 -3 3 3 -3 1 1 -3 -3 -3 1 1 3 -1 -3 -3 -3 1 1 1 1 3 -3 -3 -1 3 -3 -1 1 -1 3 1 1 3 -1 1 3 1 -3 3 -3 -3 1 -3 3 -3 1 -3 1 -1 -3 1 -3 3 -1 -1 1 -1 1 3 -1 -1 3 -3 1 -1 3 3 -3 1 -1 1 -3 3 1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 -3 -3 3 -1 1 3 1 3 3 1 -3 -3 -3 1 3 -1 -3 3 3 3 3 3 -1 1 1 3 1 -1 -3 3 -1 -1 3 -1 -3 3 1 3 -1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 3 -3 -1 -3 -1 1 -1 1 -3 -1 -3 -3 1 -1 -3 3 -3 1 -3 3 -1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 -3 -3 1 1 -3 -1 -1 3 -1 -1 3 -1 -3 -1 1 3 -3 -3 -3 3 3 -1 -1 3 -3 3 1 -1
3GPP
Release 8
21
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
RS RB Table 5.5.1.2-2: Definition of (n) for M sc = 2 N sc .
u
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 -1 -3 3 -1 -1 -3 1 -3 -3 1 -1 1 1 3 -3 -1 -1 1 1 1 -1 -3 -3 -1 1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 3 3 -1 -3 -1 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 3 -1 -3 -1 -3 3 1 3 -3 -3 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -3 -3 1 1 -3 3 -3 -3 -3 3 3 1 1 1 3 -1 -3 -3 1 3 -1 -1 -1 3 3 -1 -1 3 -3 1 -3 3 3 -3 -3 3 3 -3 -3 3 1 1 -1 -1 -1 3 1 3 1 -3 1 3 -1 -1 -1 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 -1 3 -3 -3 1 1 -1 -3 3 1 -1 -1 3 3 3 -1 1 -1 3 1 3 1 3 3 1 -1 -1 1 -1 -1 -3 -1 1 1 -3 -1 1 -3 -3 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -3 1 3 -1 -1 -1 -3 -3 1 -1 3 -3 -1 1 1 -3 -1 1 -3 -3 1 1 3 -3 -1 -3 -3 3 3 -1 -1 -3 -3 -1 -3 3 3 -1 -1 -3 3 3 3 -3 3 -1 3 3 -3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 -1 -1 1 -1 3 3 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 1 -1 1 -3 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -3 3 3 -3 3 -3 -3 1 -3 3 -1 -1 1 3 1 -1 1 -1 -3 3 -3 -1 -3 3 -1 1 -1 -3 1 3 3 -1 3 -1 3 1 1 3 3 -3 -3 -3 -3 1 3 -3 -3 -3 1 3 -1 3 -3 3 -1 -1 -3 -1 -1 -1
(0),..., (23)
1 1 3 -1 -1 -3 -1 1 -1 3 -3 -3 3 -1 1 -1 3 3 1 3 -3 1 3 -3 3 -1 3 -1 -3 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 -1 3 -1 3 -3 -3 -1 1 1 3 1 3 3 -3 3 -3 -3 1 -1 -3 -3 -1 1 3 -3 1 -1 3 -1 1 1 1 -1 3 -1 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 -3 1 1 -1 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 1 -1 -1 1 -1 -1 -3 3 1 3 3 3 3 -1 1 -1 3 1 -3 -1 -1 1 1 1 -3 -1 1 1 -1 3 -1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -3 -3 -3 3 -1 1 1 1 -3 1 -3 -1 -1 3 -1 -3 -3 -3 1 3 1 -1 1 1 -3 3 1 3 -3 1 1 3 3 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 1 1 3 -3 -3 1 -1 3 1 -1 1 -1 -1 1 -3 -3 -1 3 3 1 -3 -3 1 3 1 -3 3 -1 3 3 1 3 -3 -1 -3 3 1 -3 -1 3 -1 -3 -3 -1 -3 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -3 -3 -1 1 -1 -1 -1 1 3 1 -3 1 3 3 -3 3 -3 -3 1 -3 3 -1 1 1 -1 3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -1 1 -3 -3 1 1 3 -3 -3 1 1 -1 -3 1 -3 -3 1 -1 1 -3 -3 1 3 -3 1 3 3 3 1 -1 -1 -3 -1 -3 3 -1 3 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 1 1 3 3 -1 -3 1 -3 -1 -3 -3 1 -1 -1 -3 3 3 -3 1 3 3 -1 3 -3 3 1 -1 -3 -3 -3 -1 -1 -3 1 1 -1 -3 -3 3 -1 -3 -3 1 1 -1 -1 1 -3 1 -1 1 3 -3 -1 3 -1 -3 -3 1 -1 3 -1 -1 1 3 -3 -1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -3 -3 -3 1 -3 -3 -1 1 -3 1 1 -1 3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1 -3 -3 3 -1 -1 1 -3 1 -3 1 3 1 -1 3 3 -1 -1 -1 -3 -3 -1 -3 -3 3 3 -1 1 -1 -1 3
5.5.1.3
Group hopping
The sequence-group number u in slot ns is defined by a group hopping pattern f gh (ns ) and a sequence-shift pattern
f ss (ns ) according to u = f gh (ns ) + f ss (ns ) mod 30
There are 17 different hopping patterns and 30 different sequence-shift patterns. Sequence-group hopping can be enabled or disabled by higher layers. PUCCH and PUSCH have the same hopping pattern but may have different sequence-shift patterns. The group-hopping pattern f gh (ns ) is the same for PUSCH and PUCCH and given by
0 f gh (ns ) = if group hopping is disabled
4 i =0
c(5ns + i ) 2 i mod 30 if group hopping is enabled
where the pseudo-random sequence c(i ) is defined by section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be
cell at the beginning of each radio frame. initialized with cinit = f N ID
The sequence-shift pattern f ss (ns ) definition differs between PUCCH and PUSCH.
PUCCH For PUCCH, the sequence-shift pattern f ss (ns ) is derived from the physical-layer cell identity.
3GPP
Release 8
22
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
PUSCH PUSCH PUCCH For PUSCH, the sequence-shift pattern f ss (ns ) is given by f ss (ns ) = f ss (ns ) + ss mod 30 , where ss {0,1,...,29} is configured by higher layers.
5.5.1.4
Sequence hopping
RS RB Sequence hopping only applies for reference-signals of length M sc 6 N sc . RS RB For reference-signals of length M sc < 6 N sc , the base sequence number v within the base sequence group is given by v=0. RS RB For reference-signals of length M sc 6 N sc , the base sequence number v within the base sequence group is defined by
c(i ) if group hopping is disabled and sequence hopping is enabled v= otherwise 0
where the pseudo-random sequence c(i ) is given by section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be
cell at the beginning of each radio frame. initialized with cinit = f N ID
5.5.2
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.1.1
Demodulation reference signal

Demodulation reference signal for PUSCH
Reference signal sequence
The demodulation reference signal sequence r PUSCH () for PUSCH is defined by

RS ) r PUSCH m M sc + n = ru(, v (n )
where
m = 0,1
RS n = 0,..., M sc 1
and
RS PUSCH M sc = M sc ) ( ) RS Section 5.5.1 defines the sequence ru( ,v (0),..., ru ,v ( M sc 1) .
The cyclic shift in a slot is given by Table 5.5.2.1.1-1 with

RS ncs = (nDMRS + nPRS ) mod N shift RS where N shift is the number of shifts available in the cell, nDMRS is included in the uplink scheduling grant in case of multiple shifts within the cell and nPRS is given by the pseudo-random sequence c(i ) is defined by section 7.2. The cell at the beginning of each radio frame. pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialized with cinit = f N ID
3GPP
Release 8
23
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.5.2.1.1-1: Demodulation reference signal cyclic shift for PUSCH.

ncs
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5.5.2.1.2
The sequence r PUSCH () shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor PUSCH and mapped in sequence starting with r PUSCH (0) to the same set of physical resource blocks used for the corresponding PUSCH transmission defined in Section 5.3.4. The mapping to resource elements (k , l ) with l = 3 in the subframe shall be in increasing order of first k , then the slot number.
5.5.2.2
5.5.2.2.1
Demodulation reference signal for PUCCH

Reference signal sequence
The demodulation reference signal sequence r PUCCH () for PUCCH is defined by

PUCCH RS RS ) r PUCCH m' N RS M sc + mM sc + n = w (m) z (m)ru(, v (n )
where
PUCCH 1 m = 0,..., N RS RS 1 n = 0,..., M sc
m' = 0,1
For PUCCH format 2a and 2b, z (m) equals d (10) for m = 1 , where d (10) is defined in Section 5.4.2. For all other cases, z (m) = 1.
) RS The sequence ru(, v ( n) is given by Section 5.5.1 with M sc = 12 where the expression for the cyclic shift is
determined by the PUCCH format. For PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b, (ns ) is given by
n(n ) PUCCH N s shift noc (ns ) = N 2 n(ns ) PUCCH shift
for normal cyclic prefix
for extended cyclic prefix
RB (ns )= 2 ncs (ns ) N sc
n cell (n , l ) + n(n ) PUCCH + PUCCH + n (n ) mod PUCCH mod N mod N RB cs s s shift offset oc s shift sc ncs (ns )= cell PUCCH PUCCH RB n (n , l ) + n(ns ) shift + offset + noc (ns ) mod N mod N sc cs s
[ [
( (
))
for normal cyclic prefix for extended cyclic prefix
3GPP
Release 8
24
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
PUCCH cell where n(ns ) , N , PUCCH , offset and ncs (ns , l ) are defined by Section 5.4.1. The number of reference symbols shift PUCCH and the sequence w (n) are given by Table 5.5.2.2.1-1 and 5.5.2.2.1-2, respectively. per slot N RS
For PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b, (ns ) is defined by Section 5.4.2. The number of reference symbols per slot
PUCCH N RS and the sequence w (n) are given by Table 5.5.2.2.1-1 and 5.5.2.2.1-3, respectively. PUCCH Table 5.5.2.2.1-1: Number of PUCCH demodulation reference symbols per slot N RS .
PUCCH format 1, 1a, 1b 2 2a, 2b
Normal cyclic prefix 3 2 2
Extended cyclic prefix 2 1 N/A
PUCCH Table 5.5.2.2.1-2: Orthogonal sequences w (0) w ( N RS 1)
for PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b.
Sequence index noc ( ns ) 0 1 2
Normal cyclic prefix
Extended cyclic prefix
[1 [1
[1
e j 2 e j 4
1 1]
3 3
e j 4 e j 2
3 3
] ]
[1 1] [1
1]
N/A
PUCCH Table 5.5.2.2.1-3: Orthogonal sequences w (0) w ( N RS 1)
for PUCCH formats 2, 2a, 2b.
Normal cyclic prefix
[1 1]
[1]
5.5.2.2.2
The sequence r PUCCH () shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor PUCCH and mapped in sequence starting with r PUCCH (0) to resource elements (k , l ) . The mapping shall be in increasing order of first k , then l and finally the slot number. The same set of values for k as for the corresponding PUCCH transmission shall be used. The values of the symbol index l in a slot are given by Table 5.5.2.2.2-1.
Table 5.5.2.2.2-1: Demodulation reference signal location for different PUCCH formats
PUCCH format 1, 1a, 1b 2, 2a, 2b Set of values for l Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix 2, 3, 4 2, 3 1, 5 3
5.5.3
Sounding reference signal
The sounding reference signal is not transmitted simultaneously with PUCCH format 1. PUCCH format 1 takes precedence over the sounding reference signal in case their respective configurations cause an overlap in time.
5.5.3.1
Sequence generation
) The sounding reference signal sequence r SRS (n ) = ru(, v (n ) is defined by Section 5.5.1. The sequence index to use is
derived from the PUCCH base sequence index.
3GPP
Release 8
25
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.5.3.2
RS The sequence r SRS (0),..., r SRS ( M sc 1) shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor SRS and mapped in
sequence starting with r SRS (0) to resource elements (k , l ) according to

RS 1 r SRS ( k ) k = 0,1,..., M sc a2 k + k0 ,l = SRS 0 otherwise
where k 0 is the frequency-domain starting position of the sounding reference signal and M sc is the length of the sounding reference signal sequence.
RS
5.6
SC-FDMA baseband signal generation
This section applies to all uplink physical signals and physical channels except the physical random access channel. The time-continuous signal sl (t ) in SC-FDMA symbol l in an uplink slot is defined by
sl (t ) =
UL RB N sc / 2 1 N RB
UL RB k = N RB N sc / 2
a k ( ) ,l e
j 2 (k +1 2 )f (t N CP ,l Ts )
RB for 0 t < (N CP,l + N ) Ts where k ( ) = k + N UL RB N sc 2 , N = 2048 , f = 15 kHz and a k ,l is the content of resource
element (k , l ) .
The SC-FDMA symbols in a slot shall be transmitted in increasing order of l , starting with l = 0 , where SC-FDMA symbol l > 0 starts at time
l 1 l =0
( N CP ,l + N )Ts within the slot.
Table 5.6-1lists the values of N CP,l that shall be used. Note that different SC-FDMA symbols within a slot may have different cyclic prefix lengths.
Table 5.6-1: SC-FDMA parameters.

Configuration Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix Cyclic prefix length N CP ,l
160 for l = 0 144 for l = 1,2,...,6 512 for l = 0,1,...,5
5.7
5.7.1
Physical random access channel

Time and frequency structure
The physical layer random access preamble, illustrated in Figure 5.7.1-1, consists of a cyclic prefix of length TCP and a sequence part of length TSEQ . The parameter values are listed in Table 5.7.1-1 and depend on the frame structure and the random access configuration. Higher layers control the preamble format.
3GPP
Release 8
26
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
TCP
TSEQ
Figure 5.7.1-1: Random access preamble format.
Table 5.7.1-1: Random access preamble parameters.

Preamble format 0 1 2 3 4 (frame structure type 2 only)
TCP
TSEQ
3168 Ts 21024 Ts 6240 Ts 21024 Ts 448 Ts
24576 Ts 24576 Ts 2 24576 Ts 2 24576 Ts 4096 Ts
The transmission of a random access preamble, if triggered by the MAC layer, is restricted to certain time and frequency resources. These resources are enumerated in increasing order of the subframe number within the radio frame and the physical resource blocks in the frequency domain such that index 0 correspond to the lowest numbered physical resource block and subframe within the radio frame. For preamble format 0-3, there is at most one random access resource per subframe for FDD. Table 5.7.1-2 lists the subframes in which random access preamble transmission is allowed for a given configuration. The start of the random access preamble shall be aligned with the start of the corresponding uplink subframe at the UE assuming a timing advance of zero. For PRACH configuration 0, 1, 2, 15, the UE may for handover purposes assume an absolute value of the relative time difference between radio frame i in the current cell and the target cell of less than 153600 Ts .
Table 5.7.1-2: Random access preamble timing for preamble format 0-3.
PRACH configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 System frame number Even Even Even Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Even Subframe number 1 4 7 1 4 7 1, 6 2 ,7 3, 8 1, 4, 7 2, 5, 8 3, 6, 9 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 9
For preamble format 4 available in TDD only, the preamble shall start 4832 Ts before the end of the UpPTS at the UE. In the frequency domain, the random access preamble occupies a bandwidth corresponding to 6 resource blocks for both frame structures.
5.7.2
Preamble sequence generation
The random access preambles are generated from Zadoff-Chu sequences with zero correlation zone, generated from one or several root Zadoff-Chu sequences. The network configures the set of preamble sequences the UE is allowed to use.
3GPP
Release 8
27
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
There are 64 preambles available in each cell. The set of 64 preamble sequences in a cell is found by including first, in the order of increasing cyclic shift, all the available cyclic shifts of a root Zadoff-Chu sequence with the logical index RACH_ROOT_SEQUENCE, where RACH_ROOT_SEQUENCE is broadcasted as part of the System Information. Additional preamble sequences, in case 64 preambles cannot be generated from a single root Zadoff-Chu sequence, are obtained from the root sequences with the consecutive logical indexes until all the 64 sequences are found. The logical root sequence order is cyclic: the logical index 0 is consecutive to 837. The relation between a logical root sequence index and physical root sequence index u is given by Tables 5.7.2-4 and 5.7.2-5 for preamble formats 0 3 and 4, respectively. The u th root Zadoff-Chu sequence is defined by
xu (n ) = e
j
un ( n +1)
N ZC
, 0 n N ZC 1
where the length N ZC of the Zadoff-Chu sequence is given by Table 5.7.2-1. From the u th root Zadoff-Chu sequence, random access preambles with zero correlation zones of length N CS 1 are defined by cyclic shifts according to
xu ,v (n) = xu ((n + Cv ) mod N ZC )
where the cyclic shift is given by

vN CS Cv = RA RA d start v nshift + (v mod nshift ) N CS
v = 0,1,..., N ZC N CS 1
for unrestricted sets
RA RA RA 1 for restricted sets v = 0,1,..., nshift ngroup + nshift
and N CS is given by Tables 5.7.2-2 and 5.7.2-3 for preamble formats 0-3 and 4, respectively. The variable d u is the cyclic shift corresponding to a Doppler shift of magnitude 1 TSEQ and is given by
1 u mod N ZC du = 1 N ZC u mod N ZC
0 u 1 mod N ZC < N ZC 2 otherwise
The parameters for restricted sets of cyclic shifts depend on d u . For N CS d u < N ZC 3 , the parameters are given by
RA nshift = d u N CS RA d start = 2d u + nshift N CS RA ngroup = N ZC d start
RA RA nshift = max ( N ZC 2d u ngroup d start ) N CS ,0
For N ZC 3 d u ( N ZC N CS ) 2 , the parameters are given by

RA = ( N ZC 2d u ) N CS nshift RA d start = N ZC 2d u + nshift N CS RA = d u d start ngroup
RA RA RA = min max (d u ngroup nshift d start ) N CS ,0 , nshift
( (
For all other values of d u , there are no cyclic shifts in the restricted set.
3GPP
Release 8
28
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.7.2-1: Random access preamble sequence length.

Preamble format 03 4
N ZC
839 139
Table 5.7.2-2: Cyclic shifts N CS for preamble generation (preamble formats 0-3).
N CS
configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
N CS value
Unrestricted set 0 13 15 18 22 26 32 38 46 59 76 93 119 167 279 419 Restricted set 15 18 22 26 32 38 46 55 68 82 100 128 158 202 237 -
Table 5.7.2-3: Cyclic shifts N CS for preamble generation (preamble format 4).
N CS
configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
N CS value
2 4 6 8 10 12 15
3GPP
Release 8
29
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.7.2-4: Root Zadoff-Chu sequence order for preamble formats 0 3.

Logical root sequence number 023 2429 3035 3641 4251 5263 6475 7689 90115 116135 136167 168203 204263 Physical root sequence number u (in increasing order of the corresponding logical sequence number) 129, 710, 140, 699, 120, 719, 210, 629, 168, 671, 84, 755, 105, 734, 93, 746, 70, 769, 60, 779 2, 837, 1, 838 56, 783, 112, 727, 148, 691 80, 759, 42, 797, 40, 799 35, 804, 73, 766, 146, 693 31, 808, 28, 811, 30, 809, 27, 812, 29, 810 24, 815, 48, 791, 68, 771, 74, 765, 178, 661, 136, 703 86, 753, 78, 761, 43, 796, 39, 800, 20, 819, 21, 818 95, 744, 202, 637, 190, 649, 181, 658, 137, 702, 125, 714, 151, 688 217, 622, 128, 711, 142, 697, 122, 717, 203, 636, 118, 721, 110, 729, 89, 750, 103, 736, 61, 778, 55, 784, 15, 824, 14, 825 12, 827, 23, 816, 34, 805, 37, 802, 46, 793, 207, 632, 179, 660, 145, 694, 130, 709, 223, 616 228, 611, 227, 612, 132, 707, 133, 706, 143, 696, 135, 704, 161, 678, 201, 638, 173, 666, 106, 733, 83, 756, 91, 748, 66, 773, 53, 786, 10, 829, 9, 830 7, 832, 8, 831, 16, 823, 47, 792, 64, 775, 57, 782, 104, 735, 101, 738, 108, 731, 208, 631, 184, 655, 197, 642, 191, 648, 121, 718, 141, 698, 149, 690, 216, 623, 218, 621 152, 687, 144, 695, 134, 705, 138, 701, 199, 640, 162, 677, 176, 663, 119, 720, 158, 681, 164, 675, 174, 665, 171, 668, 170, 669, 87, 752, 169, 670, 88, 751, 107, 732, 81, 758, 82, 757, 100, 739, 98, 741, 71, 768, 59, 780, 65, 774, 50, 789, 49, 790, 26, 813, 17, 822, 13, 826, 6, 833 5, 834, 33, 806, 51, 788, 75, 764, 99, 740, 96, 743, 97, 742, 166, 673, 172, 667, 175, 664, 187, 652, 163, 676, 185, 654, 200, 639, 114, 725, 189, 650, 115, 724, 194, 645, 195, 644, 192, 647, 182, 657, 157, 682, 156, 683, 211, 628, 154, 685, 123, 716, 139, 700, 212, 627, 153, 686, 213, 626, 215, 624, 150, 689 225, 614, 224, 615, 221, 618, 220, 619, 127, 712, 147, 692, 124, 715, 193, 646, 205, 634, 206, 633, 116, 723, 160, 679, 186, 653, 167, 672, 79, 760, 85, 754, 77, 762, 92, 747, 58, 781, 62, 777, 69, 770, 54, 785, 36, 803, 32, 807, 25, 814, 18, 821, 11, 828, 4, 835 3, 836, 19, 820, 22, 817, 41, 798, 38, 801, 44, 795, 52, 787, 45, 794, 63, 776, 67, 772, 72 767, 76, 763, 94, 745, 102, 737, 90, 749, 109, 730, 165, 674, 111, 728, 209, 630, 204, 635, 117, 722, 188, 651, 159, 680, 198, 641, 113, 726, 183, 656, 180, 659, 177, 662, 196, 643, 155, 684, 214, 625, 126, 713, 131, 708, 219, 620, 222, 617, 226, 613 230, 609, 232, 607, 262, 577, 252, 587, 418, 421, 416, 423, 413, 426, 411, 428, 376, 463, 395, 444, 283, 556, 285, 554, 379, 460, 390, 449, 363, 476, 384, 455, 388, 451, 386, 453, 361, 478, 387, 452, 360, 479, 310, 529, 354, 485, 328, 511, 315, 524, 337, 502, 349, 490, 335, 504, 324, 515 323, 516, 320, 519, 334, 505, 359, 480, 295, 544, 385, 454, 292, 547, 291, 548, 381, 458, 399, 440, 380, 459, 397, 442, 369, 470, 377, 462, 410, 429, 407, 432, 281, 558, 414, 425, 247, 592, 277, 562, 271, 568, 272, 567, 264, 575, 259, 580 237, 602, 239, 600, 244, 595, 243, 596, 275, 564, 278, 561, 250, 589, 246, 593, 417, 422, 248, 591, 394, 445, 393, 446, 370, 469, 365, 474, 300, 539, 299, 540, 364, 475, 362, 477, 298, 541, 312, 527, 313, 526, 314, 525, 353, 486, 352, 487, 343, 496, 327, 512, 350, 489, 326, 513, 319, 520, 332, 507, 333, 506, 348, 491, 347, 492, 322, 517 330, 509, 338, 501, 341, 498, 340, 499, 342, 497, 301, 538, 366, 473, 401, 438, 371, 468, 408, 431, 375, 464, 249, 590, 269, 570, 238, 601, 234, 605 257, 582, 273, 566, 255, 584, 254, 585, 245, 594, 251, 588, 412, 427, 372, 467, 282, 557, 403, 436, 396, 443, 392, 447, 391, 448, 382, 457, 389, 450, 294, 545, 297, 542, 311, 528, 344, 495, 345, 494, 318, 521, 331, 508, 325, 514, 321, 518 346, 493, 339, 500, 351, 488, 306, 533, 289, 550, 400, 439, 378, 461, 374, 465, 415, 424, 270, 569, 241, 598 231, 608, 260, 579, 268, 571, 276, 563, 409, 430, 398, 441, 290, 549, 304, 535, 308, 531, 358, 481, 316, 523 293, 546, 288, 551, 284, 555, 368, 471, 253, 586, 256, 583, 263, 576 242, 597, 274, 565, 402, 437, 383, 456, 357, 482, 329, 510 317, 522, 307, 532, 286, 553, 287, 552, 266, 573, 261, 578 236, 603, 303, 536, 356, 483 355, 484, 405, 434, 404, 435, 406, 433 235, 604, 267, 572, 302, 537 309, 530, 265, 574, 233, 606 367, 472, 296, 543 336, 503, 305, 534, 373, 466, 280, 559, 279, 560, 419, 420, 240, 599, 258, 581, 229, 610
264327
328383
384455
456513
514561
562629
630659 660707
708729 730751 752765 766777 778789 790795 796803 804809 810815 816819 820837
3GPP
Release 8
30
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.7.2-5: Root Zadoff-Chu sequence order for preamble format 4.

Logical root sequence number 0 19 20 39 40 59 60 79 80 99 100 119 120 137 Physical root sequence number u (in increasing order of the corresponding logical sequence number) 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 138 128 118 108 98 88 78 2 12 22 32 42 52 62 137 127 117 107 97 87 77 3 13 23 33 43 53 63 136 126 116 106 96 86 76 4 14 24 34 44 54 64 135 125 115 105 95 85 75 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 134 124 114 104 94 84 74 6 16 26 36 46 56 66 133 123 113 103 93 83 73 7 17 27 37 47 57 67 132 122 112 102 92 82 72 8 18 28 38 48 58 68 131 121 111 101 91 81 71 9 19 29 39 49 59 69 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 10 129 20 119 30 109 40 99 50 89 60 79 -
5.7.3
Baseband signal generation

2nk N ZC
The time-continuous random access signal s (t ) is defined by

s (t ) = PRACH
N ZC 1 N ZC 1 k =0 n =0
u ,v ( n) e
1 e j 2 (k + + K (k0 + 2 ))f RA (t TCP )
RB UL RB where 0 t < TSEQ + TCP , PRACH is an amplitude scaling factor and k 0 = k RA N sc N RB N sc 2 . The location in the
frequency domain is controlled by the parameter k RA , expressed as a physical resource block number configured by
UL higher layers and fulfilling 0 k RA N RB 6 . The factor K = f f RA accounts for the difference in subcarrier
spacing between the random access preamble and uplink data transmission. The variable f RA , the subcarrier spacing for the random access preamble, and the variable , a fixed offset determining the frequency-domain location of the random access preamble within the physical resource blocks, are both given by Table 5.7.3-1.
Table 5.7.3-1: Random access baseband parameters.
Preamble format 03 4
f RA
1250 Hz 7500 Hz
7 2
5.8
Modulation and upconversion
Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the complex-valued SC-FDMA baseband signal for each antenna port is shown in Figure 5.8-1. The filtering required prior to transmission is defined by the requirements in [6].
3GPP
Release 8
31
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
cos (2f 0 t )
Re {sl (t )}
sl (t )
Im{sl (t )}
sin (2f 0 t )
Figure 5.8-1: Uplink modulation.
6
6.1
Downlink
Overview
The smallest time-frequency unit for downlink transmission is denoted a resource element and is defined in Section 6.2.2.
6.1.1
Physical channels
A downlink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers and is the interface defined between 36.212 and 36.211. The following downlink physical channels are defined: Physical Downlink Shared Channel, PDSCH Physical Broadcast Channel, PBCH Physical Multicast Channel, PMCH Physical Control Format Indicator Channel, PCFICH Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel, PHICH
6.1.2
Physical signals
A downlink signal corresponds to a set of resource elements used by the physical layer but does not carry information originating from higher layers. The following downlink physical signals are defined: Reference signal Synchronization signal
3GPP
Release 8
32
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.2
6.2.1
Slot structure and physical resource elements

Resource grid
DL RB DL The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of N RB N sc subcarriers and N symb OFDM symbols. DL The resource grid structure is illustrated in Figure 6.2.2-1. The quantity N RB depends on the downlink transmission bandwidth configured in the cell and shall fulfil min, DL DL max,DL N RB N RB N RB min, DL max,DL where N RB = 6 and N RB = 110 are the smallest and largest downlink bandwidth, respectively, supported by the current version of this specification. DL is given by [6]. The number of OFDM symbols in a slot depends on the cyclic The set of allowed values for N RB prefix length and subcarrier spacing configured and is given in Table 6.2.3-1.
In case of multi-antenna transmission, there is one resource grid defined per antenna port. An antenna port is defined by its associated reference signal. The set of antenna ports supported depends on the reference signal configuration in the cell: Cell-specific reference signals, associated with non-MBSFN transmission, support a configuration of one, two, or four antenna ports and the antenna port number p shall fulfil p = 0 , p {0,1} , and p {0,1,2,3} , respectively. MBSFN reference signals, associated with MBSFN transmission, are transmitted on antenna port p = 4 . UE-specific reference signals are transmitted on antenna port p = 5 .
6.2.2
Resource elements
Each element in the resource grid for antenna port p is called a resource element and is uniquely identified by the
DL RB DL index pair (k , l ) in a slot where k = 0,..., N RB N sc 1 and l = 0,..., N symb 1 are the indices in the frequency and time ( p) domains, respectively. Resource element (k , l ) on antenna port p corresponds to the complex value ak ,l . When there
is no risk for confusion, or no particular antenna port is specified, the index p may be dropped.
3GPP
Release 8
33
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Tslot
DL N symb
DL RB k = N RB N sc 1
DL RB N symb N sc
subcarrier s subcarrier s
DL RB N RB N sc
(k , l )
RB N sc
k =0
l=0
l=
DL N symb
Figure 6.2.2-1: Downlink resource grid.
6.2.3
Resource blocks
Resource blocks are used to describe the mapping of certain physical channels to resource elements.. Physical and virtual resource blocks are defined.
DL RB consecutive OFDM symbols in the time domain and N sc consecutive A physical resource block is defined as N symb
DL RB and N sc are given by Table 6.2.3-1. A physical resource block thus subcarriers in the frequency domain, where N symb
DL RB N sc resource elements, corresponding to one slot in the time domain and 180 kHz in the frequency consists of N symb
domain.
DL 1 in the frequency domain. The relation between the physical Physical resource blocks are numbered from 0 to N RB resource block number nPRB in the frequency domain and resource elements (k , l ) in a slot is given by
k nPRB = RB N sc
3GPP
Release 8
34
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 6.2.3-1: Physical resource blocks parameters.

Configuration Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix
RB N sc DL N symb
f = 15 kHz f = 15 kHz f = 7.5 kHz
12 24
7 6 3
A virtual resource block is of the same size as a physical resource block. Virtual resource blocks are numbered from 0 DL 1 . Two types of virtual resource blocks are defined: to N RB Virtual resource blocks of localized type Virtual resource blocks of distributed type
Virtual resource blocks of localized type are mapped directly to physical resource blocks such that virtual resource block nVRB corresponds to physical resource block nPRB = nVRB . Virtual resource blocks of distributed type are mapped to physical resource blocks such that virtual resource block nVRB corresponds to physical resource block nPRB = f (nVRB , ns ) , where ns is the slot number within a radio frame. The virtual-to-physical resource block mapping is different in the two slots of a subframe.
6.2.4
Resource-element groups
Resource-element groups are used for defining the mapping of control channels to resource elements. A resource-element group is represented by the index pair (k , l ) of the resource element with the lowest index k in the group with all resource elements in the group having the same value of l . The set of resource elements (k , l ) in a resource-element group depends on the number of cell-specific reference signals configured as described below with RB DL k 0 = nPRB N sc , 0 nPRB < N RB . In the first OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe the two resource-element groups in physical resource block nPRB consist of resource elements (k , l = 0) with k = k 0 + 0, k 0 + 1,..., k 0 + 5 and k = k 0 + 6, k 0 + 7,..., k 0 + 11 , respectively. In the second OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe in case of one or two cell-specific reference signals configured, the three resource-element groups in physical resource block nPRB consist of resource elements (k , l = 1) with k = k 0 + 0, k 0 + 1,..., k 0 + 3 , k = k 0 + 4, k 0 + 5,..., k 0 + 7 and k = k 0 + 8, k 0 + 9,..., k 0 + 11 , respectively. In the second OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe in case of four cell-specific reference signals configured, the two resource-element groups in physical resource block nPRB consist of resource elements (k , l = 1) with k = k 0 + 0, k 0 + 1,..., k 0 + 5 and k = k 0 + 6, k 0 + 7,..., k 0 + 11 , respectively. In the third OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe, the three resource-element groups in physical resource block nPRB consist of resource elements (k , l = 2) with k = k 0 + 0, k 0 + 1,..., k 0 + 3 , k = k 0 + 4, k 0 + 5,..., k 0 + 7 and k = k 0 + 8, k 0 + 9,..., k 0 + 11 , respectively.
Mapping of a symbol-quadruplet z (i ), z (i + 1), z (i + 2), z (i + 3) onto a resource-element group represented by resourceelement (k , l ) is defined such that elements z (i ) are mapped to resource elements (k , l ) of the resource-element group not used for cell-specific reference signals in increasing order of i and k . In case a single cell-specific reference signal is configured, cell-specific reference signals shall be assumed to be present on antenna ports 0 and 1 for the purpose of mapping a symbol-quadruplet to a resource-element group, otherwise the number of cell-specific reference signals shall be assumed equal to the actual number of antenna ports used for cell-specific reference signals.
3GPP
Release 8
35
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.2.5
Guard period for half-duplex FDD operation
For half-duplex FDD operation, a guard period is created by the UE by not receiving the last part of a downlink subframe immediately preceding an uplink subframe from the same UE.
6.2.6
Guard Period for TDD Operation
For frame structure type 2, the GP field in Figure 4.2-1 serves as a guard period.
6.3
General structure for downlink physical channels
This section describes a general structure, applicable to more than one physical channel. The baseband signal representing a downlink physical channel is defined in terms of the following steps: scrambling of coded bits in each of the code words to be transmitted on a physical channel modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulation symbols mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on each layer for transmission on the antenna ports mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for each antenna port to resource elements generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for each antenna port
Figure 6.3-1: Overview of physical channel processing.
6.3.1
Scrambling
(q) (q) For each code word q , the block of bits b ( q ) (0),..., b ( q ) ( M bit 1) , where M bit is the number of bits in code word q
transmitted on the physical channel in one subframe, shall be scrambled prior to modulation, resulting in a block of ~ ~ (q) 1) according to scrambled bits b ( q ) (0),..., b ( q ) ( M bit
~ b q (i ) = b q (i ) + c q (i ) mod 2
where the scrambling sequence c q (i ) is given by Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised at the start of each subframe, where the initialisation value of cinit depends on the transport channel type according to
cell 214 + q 213 + ns 2 2 9 + N ID n cinit = RNTI 9 MBSFN ns 2 2 + N ID
for PDSCH for PMCH
where nRNTI corresponds to the identity of the UE(s) to which the PDSCH transmission is intended. Up to two code words can be transmitted in one subframe, i.e., q {0,1}.
3GPP
Release 8
36
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.3.2
Modulation
~ ~ (q) For each code word q , the block of scrambled bits b ( q ) (0),..., b ( q ) ( M bit 1) shall be modulated as described in
Section 7.1 using one of the modulation schemes in Table 6.3.2-1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation (q) 1) . symbols d ( q ) (0),..., d ( q ) ( M symb
Table 6.3.2-1: Modulation schemes
Physical channel PDSCH PMCH Modulation schemes QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
6.3.3
Layer mapping
The complex-valued modulation symbols for each of the code words to be transmitted are mapped onto one or several (q) 1) for code word q shall be mapped onto the layers. Complex-valued modulation symbols d ( q ) (0),..., d ( q ) ( M symb
layer layer layers x(i ) = x (0) (i ) ... x ( 1) (i ) , i = 0,1,..., M symb is the number of 1 where is the number of layers and M symb
T
modulation symbols per layer.
6.3.3.1
Layer mapping for transmission on a single antenna port
For transmission on a single antenna port, a single layer is used, = 1 , and the mapping is defined by
x ( 0) (i ) = d ( 0) (i )
layer (0) with M symb = M symb .
6.3.3.2
Layer mapping for spatial multiplexing
For spatial multiplexing, the layer mapping shall be done according to Table 6.3.3.2-1. The number of layers is less than or equal to the number of antenna ports P used for transmission of the physical channel.
Table 6.3.3.2-1: Codeword-to-layer mapping for spatial multiplexing
Number of layers Number of code words 1 2 Codeword-to-layer mapping
layer i = 0,1,..., M symb 1 layer ( 0) M symb = M symb layer ( 0) (1) M symb = M symb = M symb
1 2
x ( 0) (i) = d (0) (i ) x ( 0) (i ) = d ( 0) (i ) x (1) (i ) = d (1) (i )

x ( 0) (i ) = d ( 0) (i )
x (1) (i ) = d (1) (2i ) x ( 2) (i ) = d (1) (2i + 1)
x ( 0) (i ) = d ( 0) (2i ) x (1) (i ) = d ( 0) (2i + 1)
layer ( 0) (1) M symb = M symb = M symb 2
x ( 2) (i) = d (1) (2i ) x (3) (i ) = d (1) (2i + 1)
layer ( 0) (1) M symb = M symb 2 = M symb 2
3GPP
Release 8
37
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.3.3.3
Layer mapping for transmit diversity
For transmit diversity, the layer mapping shall be done according to Table 6.3.3.3-1. There is only one codeword and the number of layers is equal to the number of antenna ports P used for transmission of the physical channel.
Table 6.3.3.3-1: Codeword-to-layer mapping for transmit diversity
Number of layers Number of code words Codeword-to-layer mapping
layer i = 0,1,..., M symb 1
x ( 0) (i ) = d ( 0) (2i )
2 1
x (1) (i ) = d ( 0) (2i + 1) x ( 0) (i ) = d ( 0) (4i ) x (1) (i ) = d ( 0) (4i + 1)
layer (0) M symb = M symb 2
x ( 2) (i ) = d ( 0) (4i + 2) x (3) (i ) = d ( 0) (4i + 3)
layer (0) M symb = M symb 4
6.3.4
Precoding
layer The precoder takes as input a block of vectors x(i ) = x ( 0) (i ) ... x ( 1) (i ) , i = 0,1,..., M symb 1 from the layer
T
ap 1 to be mapped onto resources on mapping and generates a block of vectors y (i ) = ... y ( p ) (i ) ... , i = 0,1,..., M symb
each of the antenna ports, where y ( p ) (i ) represents the signal for antenna port p .
6.3.4.1
Precoding for transmission on a single antenna port
For transmission on a single antenna port, precoding is defined by

y ( p ) (i ) = x ( 0) (i )
where p {0,4,5} is the number of the single antenna port used for transmission of the physical channel and
ap ap layer i = 0,1,..., M symb 1 , M symb = M symb .
6.3.4.2
Precoding for spatial multiplexing
Precoding for spatial multiplexing is only used in combination with layer mapping for spatial multiplexing as described in Section 6.3.3.2. Spatial multiplexing supports two or four antenna ports and the set of antenna ports used is p {0,1} or p {0,1,2,3} , respectively.
6.3.4.2.1
Precoding for zero and small-delay CDD
For zero-delay and small-delay cyclic delay diversity (CDD), precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by
y (0) (i ) x ( 0) (i ) = D(k i )W (i ) y ( P 1) (i ) x ( 1) (i )
where the precoding matrix W (i ) is of size P , the quantity D(k i ) is a diagonal matrix for support of cyclic delay diversity, ki represents the frequency-domain index of the resource element to which complex-valued symbol y (i ) is
ap ap layer 1 , M symb = M symb . mapped to and i = 0,1,..., M symb
3GPP
Release 8
38
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
The matrix D(k i ) shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.1-1, where a UE-specific value of is semi-statically configured in the UE and the eNodeB by higher layer signalling. The quantity in Table 6.3.4.2.1-1 is the smallest
DL RB N sc . 128,256,512,1024,2048} such that N RB number from the set {
Table 6.3.4.2.1-1: Zero and small delay cyclic delay diversity.

Set of antenna ports used Number of layers
D(k i ) 0 1 0 e j 2 ki
0 1 0 e j 2 ki 0 0 0 0 0 0 e j 2 ki 2 0 j 2 ki 3 e 0 0 0
No CDD 0 Small delay
{0,1} {0,1,2,3}
1 2 1 2 3 4
For spatial multiplexing, the values of W (i ) shall be selected among the precoder elements in the codebook configured in the eNodeB and the UE. The eNodeB can further confine the precoder selection in the UE to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook subset restrictions. The configured codebook shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or 6.3.4.2.3-2.
6.3.4.2.2
Precoding for large delay CDD
For large-delay CDD, precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by

y (0) (i ) x ( 0) (i ) = W (i ) D(i )U y ( P 1) (i ) x ( 1) (i )
ap ap layer 1 , M symb = M symb . The diagonal size- matrix where the precoding matrix W (i ) is of size P and i = 0,1,..., M symb
D(i ) supporting cyclic delay diversity and the size- matrix U are both given by Table 6.3.4.2.2-1 for different numbers of layers .
The values of the precoding matrix W (i ) shall be selected among the precoder elements in the codebook configured in the eNodeB and the UE. The eNodeB can further confine the precoder selection in the UE to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook subset restriction. The configured codebook shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or 6.3.4.2.3-2.
3GPP
Release 8
39
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 6.3.4.2.2-1: Large-delay cyclic delay diversity

Number of layers 1 2
D(i )
[1]
1 1 1 1 e j 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 j 2 3 j 4 1 e e 3 j 4 3 1 e e j 8
1 1 1 e j 2 1 2 1 e j 4 j 6 1 e 1
4 4 4
[1]

4 4 1 0 0 0
3 3
1 e e j12 e j18
e e
j 4 4 j 8 4 4
j 6 4
e j12
0 1 0 e j 2i 2 0 0 1 0 e j 2i 3 0 0 e j 4i 3 0 0 0 0 j 2i 4 e 0 0 j 4i 4 0 e 0 0 0 e j 6i 4
6.3.4.2.3
Codebook for precoding
For transmission on two antenna ports, p {0,1} , the precoding matrix W (i ) for zero, small, and large-delay CDD shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or a subset thereof.
Table 6.3.4.2.3-1: Codebook for transmission on antenna ports {0,1} .
Codebook index Number of layers 1 0 2
1 0 0 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 j 1 1 2 j
1 1 0 2 0 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 j j
-
For transmission on four antenna ports, p {0,1,2,3} , the precoding matrix W for zero, small, and large-delay CDD
{ s} denotes the matrix defined by the shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-2 or a subset thereof. The quantity Wn H H un u n where I is the 4 4 identity matrix and the columns given by the set {s} from the expression Wn = I 2u n u n
vector u n is given by Table 6.3.4.2.3-2.
3GPP
Release 8
40
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 6.3.4.2.3-2: Codebook for transmission on antenna ports {0,1,2,3} .

Codebook index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
un u 0 = [1 1 1 1]T u1 = [1 j 1 u3 = [1 j ]T u 2 = [1 1 1 1]T u 4 = 1 (1 j ) u5 u6 u7 (1 j ) (1 + j ) (1 + j ) 2 2 2
1
Number of layers 2 3 4
W0{1} W1{1}
{1} W2
W0{14} W1{12}
{12} W2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
W0{124} W1{123}
{123} W2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
W0{1234} 2 W1{1234} 2
{3214} W2 2
[ =[ 1 =[ 1 =[ 1
j 1 j ]T 2 j (1 j ) j ( 1 j ) j (1 + j ) j (1 + j ) 2 2
2
T
W3{1}
{1} W4
W3{12}
{14} W4
W3{123}
{124} W4
W3{3214} 2
{1234} W4 2
2
T
W5{1}
W5{14} W6{13} W7{13} W8{12} W9{14}

{13} W10 {13} W11 {12} W12 {13} W13 {13} W14 {12} W15
W5{124} W6{134} W7{134} W8{124} W9{134}

{123} W10 {134} W11 {123} W12 {123} W13 {123} W14 {123} W15
W5{1234} 2
W6{1} W7{1} W8{1} W9{1}

{1} W10 {1} W11 {1} W12 {1} W13 {1} W14 {1} W15
W6{1324} 2 W7{1324} 2 W8{1234} 2 W9{1234} 2

{1324} W10 2 {1324} W11 2 {1234} W12 2 {1324} W13 2 {3214} W14 2
u8 = [1 1 1 1]T u9 = [1 j 1 j ]T u10 = [1 1 1 1]T u11 = [1 j 1 j ]T u12 = [1 1 1 1]T u13 = [1 1 1 1]T u14 = [1 1 1 1]T u15 = [1 1 1 1]T
{1234} W15 2
6.3.4.3
Precoding for transmit diversity
Precoding for transmit diversity is only used in combination with layer mapping for transmit diversity as described in Section 6.3.3.3. The precoding operation for transmit diversity is defined for two and four antenna ports. For transmission on two antenna ports, p {0,1} , the output y (i ) = y ( 0) (i ) defined by
y (1) (i )
of the precoding operation is
y ( 0) (2i ) j 0 Re x ( 0) (i ) 1 0 (1) (1) j y (2i ) = 1 0 1 0 Re x (i ) y ( 0) (2i + 1) 0 j Im x (0) (i ) 2 0 1 (1) (1) y (2i + 1) 1 0 j 0 Im x (i )

layer ap layer 1 with M symb = 2 M symb . for i = 0,1,..., M symb
( ( ( (
) ) ) )
For transmission on four antenna ports, p {0,1,2,3} , the output y (i ) = y ( 0) (i ) precoding operation is defined by
y (1) (i )
y ( 2) (i )
y (3) (i )
of the
3GPP
Release 8
41
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
y ( 0) (4i ) 1 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i ) y ( 2) (4i ) 0 1 (3) y ( 4i ) 0 0 y ( 0) (4i + 1) 0 1 (1) y (4i + 1) 0 0 ( 2) 1 0 y (4i + 1) y (3) (4i + 1) 1 0 0 = ( 0) 2 0 0 y (4i + 2) y (1) (4i + 2) 0 0 ( 2) y (4i + 2) 0 0 (3) 0 0 y (4i + 2) y ( 0) (4i + 3) 0 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i + 3) y ( 2) (4i + 3) 0 0 (3) 0 0 y (4i + 3)
layer ap layer for i = 0,1,..., M symb 1 with M symb = 4M symb .
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
j 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 j 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 Re x ( 0) (i ) 0 Re x (1) (i ) 0 0 Re x ( 2) (i ) 0 0 Re x (3) (i ) 0 0 Im x ( 0) (i ) j 0 Im x (1) (i ) 0 0 Im x ( 2) (i ) 0 j Im x (3) (i ) 0 0 0 j 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
( ( ( ( ( ( ( (
) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
6.3.5
Mapping to resource elements
For each of the antenna ports used for transmission of the physical channel, the block of complex-valued symbols ap y ( p ) (0),..., y ( p ) ( M symb 1) shall be mapped in sequence starting with y ( p ) (0) to resource elements (k , l ) in the physical resource blocks corresponding to the virtual resource blocks assigned for transmission and not used for transmission of PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, PBCH, synchronization signals or reference signals. The mapping to resource elements (k , l ) on antenna port p not reserved for other purposes shall be in increasing order of first the index k and then the index l , starting with the first slot in a subframe.
6.4
Physical downlink shared channel

The set of antenna ports used for transmission of the PDSCH is one of {0} , {0,1} , or {0,1,2,3} if UE-specific reference signals are not transmitted The antenna ports used for transmission of the PDSCH is {5} if UE-specific reference signals are transmitted
The physical downlink shared channel shall be processed and mapped to resource elements as described in Section 6.3 with the following exceptions: -
6.5
Physical multicast channel
The physical multicast channel shall be processed and mapped to resource elements as described in Section 6.3 with the following exceptions: No transmit diversity scheme is specified Layer mapping and precoding shall be done assuming a single antenna port and the transmission shall use antenna port 4. In subframes where PMCH is transmitted on a carrier supporting a mix of PDSCH and PMCH transmission, up to two of the first OFDM symbols of a subframe can be reserved for non-MBSFN transmission and shall not be used for PMCH transmission. The non-MBSFN symbols shall use the same cyclic prefix as used for subframe #0.
3GPP
Release 8
42
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
PMCH shall not be transmitted in subframes 0 and 5 on a carrier supporting a mix of PDSCH and PMCH transmission
6.6
6.6.1
Physical broadcast channel

Scrambling
The block of bits b(0),..., b( M bit 1) , where M bit , the number of bits transmitted on the physical broadcast channel, equals 1920 for normal cyclic prefix and 1728 for extended cyclic prefix, shall be scrambled with a cell-specific ~ ~ sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b ( M bit 1) according to
~ b (i ) = (b(i ) + c(i ) ) mod 2
where the scrambling sequence c(i ) is given by Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence shall be initialised with
cell cinit = N ID in each radio frame fulfilling nf mod 4 = 0 .
6.6.2
Modulation
~ ~ The block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b ( M bit 1) shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) . Table 6.6.2-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable
for the physical broadcast channel.

Table 6.6.2-1: PBCH modulation schemes
Physical channel PBCH Modulation schemes QPSK
6.6.3
Layer mapping and precoding
The block of modulation symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) shall be mapped to layers according to one of Sections 6.3.3.1
( 0) or 6.3.3.3 with M symb = M symb and precoded according to one of Sections 6.3.4.1 or 6.3.4.3, resulting in a block of
1,2,4} . where p = 0,..., P 1 and the number of antenna ports for cell-specific reference signals P {
vectors y (i ) = y ( 0) (i ) ... y ( P 1) (i ) , i = 0,..., M symb 1 , where y ( p ) (i ) represents the signal for antenna port p and
6.6.4
The block of complex-valued symbols y ( p ) (0),..., y ( p ) ( M symb 1) for each antenna port is transmitted during 4 consecutive radio frames starting in each radio frame fulfilling nf mod 4 = 0 and shall be mapped in sequence starting with y (0) to resource elements (k , l ) . The mapping to resource elements (k , l ) not reserved for transmission of reference signals shall be in increasing order of first the index k , then the index l in slot 1 in subframe 0 and finally the radio frame number. The resource-element indices are given by
k=
DL RB N RB N sc 36 + k ' , 2 l = 0,1,...,3
k ' = 0,1,...,71
where resource elements reserved for reference signals shall be excluded. The mapping operation shall assume cellspecific reference signals for antenna ports 0-3 being present irrespective of the actual configuration. Resource elements assumed to be reserved for reference signals in the mapping operation above but not used for transmission of reference signal shall not be used for transmission of any physical channel.
3GPP
Release 8
43
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.7
Physical control format indicator channel
The physical control format indicator channel carries information about the number of OFDM symbols used for transmission of PDCCHs in a subframe. The set of OFDM symbols possible to use for PDCCH in a subframe is given by Table 6.7-1.
Table 6.7-1: Maximum number of OFDM symbols used for PDCCH.
Subframe Subframe 1 and 6 for frame structure type 2 MBSFN subframes on a carrier supporting both PMCH and PDSCH MBSFN subframes on a carrier not supporting PDSCH All other subframes Number of OFDM symbols for PDCCH 1, 2 1, 2 0 1, 2, 3
6.7.1
Scrambling
The block of bits b(0),..., b(31) transmitted in one subframe shall be scrambled with a cell-specific sequence prior to ~ ~ modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b (31) according to
~ b (i ) = (b(i ) + c(i ) ) mod 2
cell at the start of each subframe. with cinit = ns 2 2 9 + N ID
6.7.2
Modulation
~ ~ The block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b (31) shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of
complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),..., d (15) . Table 6.7.2-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the physical control format indicator channel.
Table 6.7.2-1: PCFICH modulation schemes
Physical channel PCFICH Modulation schemes QPSK
6.7.3
The block of modulation symbols d (0),..., d (15) shall be mapped to layers according to one of Sections 6.3.3.1 or
( 0) = 16 and precoded according to one of Sections 6.3.4.1 or 6.3.4.3, resulting in a block of vectors 6.3.3.3 with M symb
p = 0,..., P 1 and the number of antenna ports for cell-specific reference signals P { 1,2,4} . The PCFICH shall be transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the PBCH.
y (i ) = y ( 0) (i ) ... y ( P 1) (i ) , i = 0,...,15 , where y ( p ) (i ) represents the signal for antenna port p and where
6.7.4
The mapping to resource elements is defined in terms of quadruplets of complex-valued symbols. Let
z ( p ) (i ) = y ( p ) (4i ), y ( p ) (4i + 1), y ( p ) (4i + 2), y ( p ) (4i + 3) denote symbol quadruplet i for antenna port p . For each of
the antenna ports, symbol quadruplets shall be mapped in increasing order of i to the four resource-element groups in the first OFDM symbol in a downlink subframe with the representative resource-element as defined in Section 6.2.4 given by
3GPP
Release 8
44
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
z ( p ) (0) is mapped to the resource - element group represented by k = k z ( p ) (1) z

( p)
DL RB is mapped to the resource - element group represented by k = k + N RB 2 N sc 2
(2) is mapped to the resource - element group represented by k = k +
z ( p ) (3) is mapped to the resource - element group represented by k = k +

DL RB N sc , where the additions are modulo N RB RB cell DL k = N sc 2 N ID mod 2 N RB cell and N ID is the physical-layer cell identity as given by Section 6.11.
DL RB 2 N RB 2 N sc DL RB 2 N sc 3N RB
2 2
)(
6.8
6.8.1
Physical downlink control channel

PDCCH formats
The physical downlink control channel carries scheduling assignments and other control information. A physical control channel is transmitted on an aggregation of one or several consecutive control channel elements (CCEs), where a control channel element corresponds to a set of resource elements. The CCEs available in the system are numbered from 0 and upwards. The PDCCH supports multiple formats as listed in Table 6.8.1-1. A PDCCH consisting of n consecutive CCEs may only start on a CCE fulfilling i mod n = 0 , where i is the CCE number. Multiple PDCCHs can be transmitted in a subframe.
Table 6.8.1-1: Supported PDCCH formats
PDCCH format 0 1 2 3 Number of CCEs 1 2 4 8 Number of PDCCH bits
6.8.2
PDCCH multiplexing and scrambling
(i) (i) The block of bits b (i ) (0),..., b (i ) ( M bit 1) on each of the control channels to be transmitted in a subframe, where M bit is
the number of bits in one subframe to be transmitted on physical downlink control channel number i , shall be multiplexed, resulting in a block of
( nPDCCH -1) (0) (1) 1), b (1) (0),..., b (1) ( M bit 1),..., b ( nPDCCH 1) (0),..., b ( nPDCCH 1) ( M bit 1) , where nPDCCH is the bits b ( 0) (0),..., b ( 0) ( M bit
number of PDCCHs transmitted in the subframe.

( nPDCCH -1) (0) (1) The block of bits b (0) (0),..., b (0) ( M bit 1), b (1) (0),..., b (1) ( M bit 1),..., b ( nPDCCH 1) (0),..., b ( nPDCCH 1) ( M bit 1) shall be
scrambled with a cell-specific sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits ~ ~ b (0),..., b ( M tot 1) according to
~ b (i ) = (b(i ) + c(i ) ) mod 2
cell at the start of each subframe. with cinit = ns 22 9 + N ID
If necessary, dummy elements shall be inserted in the block of bits prior to scrambling to ensure that the PDCCHs starts at the CCE positions as described in [4] and to ensure that the length M tot bits matches the amount of resources reserved for PDCCH transmission.
nPDCCH 1
i =0
(i ) M bit of the scrambled block of
3GPP
Release 8
45
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.8.3
Modulation
~ ~ The block of scrambled bits b (0),..., b ( M tot 1) shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) . Table 6.8.3-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable
for the physical downlink control channel.

Table 6.8.3-1: PDCCH modulation schemes
Physical channel PDCCH Modulation schemes QPSK
6.8.4
The block of modulation symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) shall be mapped to layers according to one of Sections 6.3.3.1
( 0) or 6.3.3.3 with M symb = M symb and precoded according to one of Sections 6.3.4.1 or 6.3.4.3, resulting in a block of
vectors y (i ) = y ( 0) (i ) ... y ( P 1) (i ) , i = 0,..., M symb 1 to be mapped onto resources on the antenna ports used for transmission, where y ( p ) (i ) represents the signal for antenna port p . The PDCCH shall be transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the PBCH.
6.8.5
The mapping to resource elements is defined by operations on quadruplets of complex-valued symbols. Let
z ( p ) (i ) = y ( p ) (4i ), y ( p ) (4i + 1), y ( p ) (4i + 2), y ( p ) (4i + 3) denote symbol quadruplet i for antenna port p .
The block of quadruplets z ( p ) (0),..., z ( p ) ( M quad 1) , where M quad = M symb 4 , shall be permuted according to Section 5.1.4.2.1 of [3], resulting in w ( p ) (0),..., w ( p ) ( M quad 1) . The block of quadruplets w ( p ) (0),..., w ( p ) ( M quad 1) shall be cyclically shifted, resulting in
cell w ( p ) (0),..., w ( p ) ( M quad 1) where w ( p ) (i ) = w ( p ) (i + N ID ) mod M quad .
Mapping of the block of quadruplets w ( p ) (0),..., w ( p ) ( M quad 1) is defined in terms of resource-element groups, specified in Section 6.2.4, according to steps 110 below: 1) Initialize m = 0 (resource-element group number) 2) Initialize k ' = 0 3) Initialize l ' = 0 4) If the resource element (k , l ) represents a resource-element group not assigned to PCFICH or PHICH then perform step 5 and 6, else go to step 7 5) Map symbol-quadruplet w ( p ) (m' ) to the resource-element group represented by (k , l ) for each antenna port p 6) Increase m by 1 7) Increase l ' by 1 8) Repeat from step 4 if l ' < L , where L 3 corresponds to the value represented by the sequence transmitted on the PCFICH 9) Increase k ' by 1
3GPP
Release 8
DL RB 10) Repeat from step 3 if k ' < N RB N sc
46
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.9
Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel
The PHICH carries the hybrid-ARQ ACK/NAK. Multiple PHICHs mapped to the same set of resource elements constitute a PHICH group, where PHICHs within the same PHICH group are separated through different orthogonal group seq group sequences. A PHICH resource is identified by the index pair nPHICH , nPHICH , where nPHICH is the PHICH group
number and
seq nPHICH
is the orthogonal sequence index within the group.
6.9.1
Modulation
The block of bits b(0),..., b( M bit 1) transmitted on one PHICH in one subframe shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols z (0),..., z ( M s 1) , where M s = M bit . Table 6.9.1-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel.
Table 6.9.1-1: PHICH modulation schemes
Physical channel PHICH Modulation schemes BPSK
The block of modulation symbols z (0),..., z ( M s 1) shall be bit-wise multiplied with an orthogonal sequence, resulting in a sequence of modulation symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) according to
PHICH PHICH d (i ) = w i mod N SF (1 2c(i ) ) z i N SF
where
i = 0,..., M symb 1
PHICH M symb = N SF Ms
4 normal cyclic prefix PHICH N SF = 2 extended cyclic prefix
and c(i ) is a cell-specific scrambling sequence generated according to Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence generator
cell at the start of each subframe. shall be initialised with cinit = ns 2 2 9 + N ID seq PHICH 1) is given by Table 6.9.1-2 where the sequence index nPHICH corresponds to The sequence w(0) w( N SF the PHICH number within the PHICH group.
3GPP
Release 8
47
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
PHICH Table 6.9.1-2: Orthogonal sequences w(0) w( N SF 1)
for PHICH
Sequence index
seq nPHICH
Orthogonal sequence Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[+ j [+ j [+ j [+ j
[+ 1 [+ 1 [+ 1 [+ 1
PHICH N SF =4
+ 1 + 1 + 1]
PHICH N SF =2
1 + 1 1] + 1 1 1] 1 1 + 1]
+ j + j + j] j + j j] + j j j] j j + j]
[+ 1 [+ 1 [+ j [+ j
+ 1] 1]
+ j] j]
-
6.9.2
The block of symbols d (0),..., d ( M symb 1) shall be mapped to layers and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors
p = 0,..., P 1 and the number of antenna ports for cell-specific reference signals P { 1,2,4} . The layer mapping and precoding operation depends on the cyclic prefix length and the number of antenna ports used for transmission of the PHICH. The PHICH shall be transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the PBCH. y (i ) = y ( 0) (i ) ... y ( P 1) (i ) , i = 0,..., M symb 1 , where y ( p ) (i ) represents the signal for antenna port p ,
For transmission on a single antenna port, P = 1 , layer mapping and precoding are defined by Sections 6.3.3.1 and ( 0) 6.3.4.1, respectively, with M symb = M symb . For transmission on two antenna ports, P = 2 , layer mapping and precoding are defined by Sections 6.3.3.3 and 6.3.4.3, ( 0) respectively, with M symb = M symb . For transmission on four antenna ports, P = 4 , and normal cyclic prefix, layer mapping is defined by Section 6.3.3.3 and precoding by
y ( 0) (4i ) 1 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i ) y ( 2) (4i ) 0 1 (3) y (4i ) 0 0 y ( 0) (4i + 1) 0 1 (1) y (4i + 1) 0 0 ( 2) 1 0 y (4i + 1) y (3) (4i + 1) 1 0 0 = ( 0) 2 0 0 y (4i + 2) y (1) (4i + 2) 0 0 ( 2) y (4i + 2) 0 0 y (3) (4i 2) 0 0 + y ( 0) (4i + 3) 0 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i + 3) y ( 2) (4i + 3) 0 0 (3) 0 0 y (4i + 3) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 j 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Re x ( 0) (i ) 0 Re x (1) (i ) 0 0 Re x ( 2) (i ) 0 0 Re x (3) (i ) j 0 Im x ( 0) (i ) 0 0 Im x (1) (i ) j Im x ( 2) (i ) 0 0 0 Im x (3) (i ) j 0 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
j 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
( ( ( ( ( ( ( (
) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
group group ) mod 2 = 0 where nPHICH is the PHICH group number and i = 0,1,2 , and by if (i + nPHICH
3GPP
Release 8
48
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
y ( 0) (4i ) 0 0 (1) 1 0 y (4i ) y ( 2) (4i ) 0 0 (3) y (4i ) 0 1 y ( 0) (4i + 1) 0 0 (1) y (4i + 1) 0 1 ( 2) 0 0 y (4i + 1) y (3) (4i + 1) 1 1 0 = ( 0) 2 0 0 y (4i + 2) y (1) (4i + 2) 0 0 ( 2) y (4i + 2) 0 0 y (3) (4i 2) 0 0 + y ( 0) (4i + 3) 0 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i + 3) y ( 2) (4i + 3) 0 0 (3) 0 0 y (4i + 3)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 j 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 j 0 j
0 0 0 0 0 Re x ( 0) (i ) 0 Re x (1) (i ) 0 0 Re x ( 2) (i ) 0 0 Re x (3) (i ) 0 0 Im x ( 0) (i ) j 0 Im x (1) (i ) 0 0 Im x ( 2) (i ) j 0 Im x (3) (i ) 0 0 0 j 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
( ( ( ( ( ( ( (
) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
where i = 0,1,2 otherwise. For transmission on four antenna ports, P = 4 , and extended cyclic prefix, layer mapping is defined by
[x
( 0)
(i ) x (1) (i ) x ( 2) (i )
x (3) (i )
d ( 0) (2i ) d ( 0) (2i + 1) 0 0 T = T ( 0) ( 0) 0 0 d (2i + 0) d (2i + 1)
[ [
group mod 2 = 0 nPHICH group mod 2 = 1 nPHICH
group is the PHICH group number, i = 0,1,2 , and precoding by where nPHICH
y ( 0) (4i ) 1 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i ) y ( 2) (4i ) 0 1 (3) y (4i ) 0 0 y ( 0) (4i + 1) 0 1 y (1) (4i + 1) 0 0 ( 2) 1 0 y (4i + 1) ( 3 ) y (4i + 1) 1 0 0 = ( 0) 2 0 0 y (4i + 2) y (1) (4i + 2) 0 0 ( 2) y (4i + 2) 0 0 y (3) (4i 2) 0 0 + ( 0) y (4i + 3) 0 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i + 3) y ( 2) (4i + 3) 0 0 (3) y (4i + 3) 0 0
group 2 ) mod 2 = 0 and by if (i + nPHICH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
j 0 0 0 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 j 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Re x ( 0) (i ) 0 0 Re x (1) (i ) 0 0 Re x ( 2) (i ) 0 0 Re x (3) (i ) j 0 Im x ( 0) (i ) 0 0 Im x (1) (i ) j Im x ( 2) (i ) 0 0 0 Im x (3) (i ) j 0 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0
( ( ( ( ( ( ( (
) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
3GPP
Release 8
49
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
y ( 0) (4i ) 0 0 (1) 1 0 y (4i ) y ( 2) (4i ) 0 0 (3) y (4i ) 0 1 y ( 0) (4i + 1) 0 0 (1) y (4i + 1) 0 1 ( 2) 0 0 y (4i + 1) y (3) (4i + 1) 1 1 0 = ( 0) 2 0 0 y (4i + 2) y (1) (4i + 2) 0 0 ( 2) y (4i + 2) 0 0 y (3) (4i 2) 0 0 + y ( 0) (4i + 3) 0 0 (1) 0 0 y (4i + 3) y ( 2) (4i + 3) 0 0 (3) 0 0 y (4i + 3)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 j 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 j 0 j
0 0 0 0 0 Re x ( 0) (i ) 0 Re x (1) (i ) 0 0 Re x ( 2) (i ) 0 0 Re x (3) (i ) 0 0 Im x ( 0) (i ) j 0 Im x (1) (i ) 0 0 Im x ( 2) (i ) j 0 Im x (3) (i ) 0 0 0 j 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
( ( ( ( ( ( ( (
) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
otherwise.
6.9.3
The sequence y ( p ) (0),..., y ( p ) ( M symb 1) for each of the PHICH groups is defined by
y ( p ) ( n) =
( p) i (n)
where the sum is over all PHICHs in the PHICH group and yi( p ) (n) represents the symbol sequence from the i :th PHICH in the PHICH group.
Let z ( p ) (i ) = y ( p ) (4i ), y ( p ) (4i + 1), y ( p ) (4i + 2), y ( p ) (4i + 3) , i = 0,1,2 denote symbol quadruplet i for antenna port p . Mapping to resource elements is defined in terms of symbol quadruplets according to steps 110 below: 1) For each value of i = 0,1,2 2) Let ni denote the number of resource element groups not assigned to PCFICH in OFDM symbol i 3) Number the resource-element groups not assigned to PCFICH in OFDM symbol i from 0 to ni 1 , starting from the resource-element group with the lowest frequency-domain index. 4) Initialize m = 0 (PHICH group number) 5) For each value of i = 0,1,2 6) Symbol-quadruplet z ( p ) (i ) from PHICH group m' is mapped to the resource-element group represented by (k , l ) i as defined in Section 6.2.4 where the indices k i and li are given by steps 7 and 8 below: 7) The time-domain index li is given by
0 ( m 2 + i + 1) mod 2 li = ( 2 m + i + 1) mod 2 i normal PHICH duration, all subframes extended PHICH duration, MBSFN subframes extended PHICH duration, subframe 1 and 6 in frame structure type 2 otherwise
3GPP
Release 8
50
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
8) Set the frequency-domain index k i to the resource-element group assigned the number ni in step 3 above, where ni is given by
ni =
(N (N (N
cell ID cell ID cell ID
nli n1 + m ' mod nli nli nli

i
) n1 + m '+ nl 3)mod nl n1 + m '+ 2 nl 3)mod nl

i i i
i=0 i =1 i=2
in case of extended PHICH duration in MBSFN subframes, or extended PHICH duration in subframe 1 and 6 for frame structure type 2 and by
ni =
(N (N (N
cell ID cell ID cell ID
nli n0 + m ' mod nli nli nli

i
) n0 + m '+ nl 3)mod nl n0 + m '+ 2 nl 3)mod nl

i i i
i=0 i =1 i=2
otherwise. 9) Increase m by 1. 10) Repeat from step 5 until all PHICH groups have been assigned. The PHICH duration is configurable by higher layers according to Table 6.9.3-1. The duration configured puts a lower limit on the size of the control region signalled by the PCFICH.
Table 6.9.3-1: PHICH duration in MBSFN and non-MBSFN subframes.

PHICH duration Normal Extended Non-MBSFN subframes Subframes 1 and 6 in case of All other cases frame structure type 2 1 1 2 3 MBSFN subframes On a carrier supporting both PDSCH and PMCH 1 2
6.10
-
Reference signals
Three types of downlink reference signals are defined: Cell-specific reference signals, associated with non-MBSFN transmission MBSFN reference signals, associated with MBSFN transmission UE-specific reference signals
There is one reference signal transmitted per downlink antenna port.
6.10.1
Cell-specific reference signals
Cell-specific reference signals shall be transmitted in all downlink subframes in a cell supporting non-MBSFN transmission. In case the subframe is used for transmission with MBSFN, only the first two OFDM symbols in a subframe can be used for transmission of cell-specific reference symbols. Cell-specific reference signals are transmitted on one or several of antenna ports 0 to 3. Cell-specific reference signals are defined for f = 15 kHz only.
3GPP
Release 8
51
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.10.1.1
Sequence generation
The reference-signal sequence rl ,ns (m) is defined by

rl ,ns (m) = 1 2
(1 2 c(2m)) + j
1 2
(1 2 c(2m + 1) ),
max,DL m = 0,1,...,2 N RB 1
where ns is the slot number within a radio frame and l is the OFDM symbol number within the slot. The pseudorandom sequence c(i ) is defined in Section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with
cell DL cinit = 213 l + 2 9 ns 2 + N ID at the start of each OFDM symbol where l = (ns mod 2) N symb + l is the OFDM
symbol number with a subframe.
6.10.1.2
( p) The reference signal sequence rl ,ns (m) shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak ,l used as reference
symbols for antenna port p in slot ns according to

( p) ak ,l = rl , ns ( m' )
where
k = 6m + (v + vshift ) mod 6
DL 3 if p {0,1} 0, N symb l= if p {2,3} 1 DL 1 m = 0,1,...,2 N RB max,DL DL m = m + N RB N RB
The variables v and vshift define the position in the frequency domain for the different reference signals where v is given by
0 3 3 v= 0 3(ns mod 2) 3 + 3(ns mod 2) if p = 0 and l = 0 if p = 0 and l 0 if p = 1 and l = 0 if p = 1 and l 0 if p = 2 if p = 3
cell The cell-specific frequency shift is given by vshift = N ID mod 6 .
Resource elements (k , l ) used for reference signal transmission on any of the antenna ports in a slot shall not be used for any transmission on any other antenna port in the same slot and set to zero. Figures 6.10.1.2-1 and 6.10.1.2-2 illustrate the resource elements used for reference signal transmission according to the above definition. The notation R p is used to denote a resource element used for reference signal transmission on antenna port p .
3GPP
Release 8
52
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
R0
R0
One antenna port
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
l=0
R0 l =6 l =0 l =6
Resource element (
R0
R0
R1
Two antenna ports
R0
R0
R1
R1
Not used for transmission on this antenan port
R0
R0
R1
R1
Reference symbols on this antenna port
R0 l=0
R0 l =6 l =0 l =6 l=0
R1 l =6 l =0
R1 l =6
R0
R0
R1
R1
R2
R3
Four antenna ports
R0
R0
R1
R1
R2
R3
R0
R0
R1
R1
R2
R3
R0
l=0
R0
l =6 l =0 l =6 l=0
R1
l =6 l =0
R1
l =6 l =0
R2
l=6 l=0 l=6 l=0
R3
l =6 l =0 l =6
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
Antenna port 0
Antenna port 1
Antenna port 2
Antenna port 3
Figure 6.10.1.2-1. Mapping of downlink reference signals (normal cyclic prefix).
3GPP
Release 8
53
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
l=0
R0 l=5 l=0 l=5
Resource element (
R0
R0
R1
R0
R0
R1
R1
Not used for transmission on this antenan port
R0
R0
R1
R1
Reference symbols on this antenna port
R0 l=0
R0 l=5 l=0 l=5 l=0
R1 l =5 l =0
R1 l =5
R0
R0
R1
R1
R2
R3
R0
R0
R1
R1
R2
R3
R0
R0
R1
R1
R2
R3
R0 l=0
R0 l =5 l=0 l =5 l=0
R1 l =5 l =0
R1 l =5 l=0
R2 l = 5l = 0 l =5 l=0
R3 l=5 l=0 l=5
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
even-numbered slots
odd-numbered slots
Antenna port 0
Antenna port 1
Antenna port 2
Antenna port 3
Figure 6.10.1.2-2. Mapping of downlink reference signals (extended cyclic prefix).
6.10.2
MBSFN reference signals
MBSFN reference signals shall only be transmitted in subframes allocated for MBSFN transmissions. MBSFN reference signals are transmitted on antenna port 4. MBSFN reference signals are defined for extended cyclic prefix only.
6.10.2.1
Sequence generation
The MBSFN reference-signal sequence rl ,ns (m) is defined by

rl ,ns (m) = 1 2
(1 2 c(2m)) + j
1 2
(1 2 c(2m + 1) ),
max,DL m = 0,1,...,6 N RB 1
where ns is the slot number within a radio frame and l is the OFDM symbol number within the slot. The pseudorandom sequence c(i ) is defined in Section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with
MBSFN DL cinit = 213 l + 2 9 ns 2 + N ID at the start of each OFDM symbol where l = (ns mod 2) N symb + l is the OFDM
symbol number with a subframe.
6.10.2.2
The reference-signal sequence rl ,ns (m) in OFDM symbol l shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols
( p) ak ,l with p = 4 according to
3GPP
Release 8
54
( p) ak ,l = rl , ns ( m )
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
where
if l 0 and f = 15 kHz 2m 2m + 1 if l = 0 and f = 15 kHz k= if l 0 and f = 7.5 kHz 4m 4 2 if m l = 0 and f = 7.5 kHz + if ns mod 2 = 0 and f = 15 kHz 2 0,4 if n mod 2 = 1 and f = 15 kHz s l= n 1 if s mod 2 = 0 and f = 7.5 kHz 0,2 if ns mod 2 = 1 and f = 7.5 kHz
DL m = 0,1,...,6 N RB 1 max,DL DL m = m + 3 N RB N RB
Figure 6.10.2.2-1 illustrates the resource elements used for MBSFN reference signal transmission in case of f = 15 kHz . In case of f = 7.5 kHz for a MBSFN-dedicated cell, the MBSFN reference signal shall be mapped to resource elements according to Figure 6.10.2.2-3. The notation R p is used to denote a resource element used for reference signal transmission on antenna port p .
R4
R4 R4
R4 R4
R4
R4 R4 R4
R4
R4
R4
R4 R4
R4
R4 R4
l =5l = 0 l =5
R4
l =0
Figure 6.10.2.2-1: Mapping of MBSFN reference signals (extended cyclic prefix, f = 15 kHz )
3GPP
Release 8
55
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 l = 0 l = 2l = 0 l = 2
evennumbered slots oddnumbered slots
R4
R4
R4
R4
R4
Antenna port 4 Figure 6.10.2.2-3: Mapping of MBSFN reference signals (extended cyclic prefix, f = 7.5 kHz )
6.10.3
UE-specific reference signals
UE-specific reference signals are supported for single-antenna-port transmission of PDSCH and are transmitted on antenna port 5. The UE is informed by higher layers whether the UE-specific reference signal is present and is a valid phase reference for PDSCH demodulation or not. If higher layer signalling informs the UE that the UE-specific reference signals are present and is a valid phase reference for PDSCH demodulation, the UE may ignore any transmission on antenna port 2 and 3. UE-specific reference signals are transmitted only on the resource blocks upon which the corresponding PDSCH is mapped.
6.10.3.1
Sequence generation
The UE-specific reference-signal sequence r (m) is defined by

r (m) = 1 2
(1 2 c(2m) ) + j
1 2
(1 2 c(2m + 1)),
PDSCH m = 0 ,1,...,12 N RB 1
PDSCH where N RB denotes the bandwidth in resource blocks of the corresponding PDSCH transmission.. The pseudorandom sequence c(i ) is defined in Section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with cell cinit = 213 nRNTI + 2 9 ns 2 + N ID at the start of each subframe.
3GPP
Release 8
56
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.10.3.2
In a physical resource block with frequency-domain index nPRB assigned for the corresponding PDSCH transmission,
( p) the reference signal sequence r (m) shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak ,l with p = 5 in a
subframe according to
( p) PDSCH + m) ak ,l = r (3 l N RB
where
if l {2,3} and normal cyclic prefix 4m k = 4m + 2 if l {5,6} and normal cyclic prefix 3 l = 0 6 l = 1 l= 2 l = 2 5 l = 3 0,1 if ns mod 2 = 0 and normal cyclic prefix l = 2,3 if ns mod 2 = 1 and normal cyclic prefix
PDSCH 1 m = 0,1,...,3 N RB RB nPRB k = k + N sc
The mapping shall be in increasing order of the frequency-domain index nPRB of the physical resource blocks assigned
PDSCH for the corresponding PDSCH transmission. The quantity N RB denotes the bandwidth in resource blocks of the corresponding PDSCH transmission.
Figure 6.10.3.2-1 illustrates the resource elements used for UE-specific reference signals for normal cyclic prefix. The notation R p is used to denote a resource element used for reference signal transmission on antenna port p .
R5 R5 R5
R5
R5
R5 R5 R5 R5 R5 R5
l =6 l =0 l =6
R5
l=0
Figure 6.10.2.2-1: Mapping of UE-specific reference signals (normal cyclic prefix)
3GPP
Release 8
57
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.11
Synchronization signals
There are 504 unique physical-layer cell identities. The physical-layer cell identities are grouped into 168 unique physical-layer cell-identity groups, each group containing three unique identities. The grouping is such that each physical-layer cell identity is part of one and only one physical-layer cell-identity group. A physical-layer cell identity (1) (2) (1) cell N ID = 3N ID + N ID is thus uniquely defined by a number N ID in the range of 0 to 167, representing the physical-layer
(2) in the range of 0 to 2, representing the physical-layer identity within the cell-identity group, and a number N ID physical-layer cell-identity group.
6.11.1
6.11.1.1
Primary synchronization signal

Sequence generation
The sequence d (n) used for the primary synchronization signal is generated from a frequency-domain Zadoff-Chu sequence according to
j un ( n +1) 63 e d u (n) = u ( n +1)( n + 2) e j 63 n = 0,1,...,30 n = 31,32,...,61
where the Zadoff-Chu root sequence index u is given by Table 6.11.1.1-1.

Table 6.11.1.1-1: Root indices for the primary synchronization signal.
(2) N ID
Root index u 25 29 34
0 1 2
6.11.1.2
The mapping of the sequence to resource elements depends on the frame structure. The antenna port used for transmission of the primary synchronization signal is not specified. The sequence d (n ) shall be mapped to the resource elements according to
ak ,l = d (n ), k = n 31 + n = 0,...,61
DL RB N RB N sc 2
For frame structure type 1, the primary synchronization signal shall be mapped to the last OFDM symbol in slots 0 and 10. For frame structure type 2, the primary synchronization signal shall be mapped to the third OFDM symbol in subframes 1 and 6. Resource elements (k , l ) in the OFDM symbols used for transmission of the primary synchronization signal where
k = n 31 +
DL RB N RB N sc 2 n = 5,4,...,1,62,63,...66
are reserved and not used for transmission of the primary synchronization signal.
3GPP
Release 8
58
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.11.2
6.11.2.1
Secondary synchronization signal

Sequence generation
The sequence d (0),..., d (61) used for the second synchronization signal is an interleaved concatenation of two length-31 binary sequences. The concatenated sequence is scrambled with a scrambling sequence given by the primary synchronization signal. The combination of two length-31 sequences defining the secondary synchronization signal differs between subframe 0 and subframe 5 according to
(m ) s 0 ( n)c0 (n ) in subframe 0 d ( 2 n) = 0 ( m1 ) s1 ( n)c0 (n ) in subframe 5 (m ) (m ) s 1 (n)c1 (n )z1 0 (n ) in subframe 0 d (2n + 1) = 1 ( m0 ) ( m1 ) s0 (n)c1 (n )z1 (n ) in subframe 5 (1) according to where 0 n 30 . The indices m 0 and m1 are derived from the physical-layer cell-identity group N ID
m0 = m mod 31 m1 = (m0 + m 31 + 1) mod 31 N (1) + q (q + 1) 2 (1) (1) m = N ID + q(q + 1) 2 , q = ID , q = N ID 30 30
where the output of the above expression is listed in Table 6.11.2.1-1.

( m0 ) ( m1 ) (n) and s1 (n) are defined as two different cyclic shifts of the m-sequence ~ s (n) according The two sequences s0 to ( m0 ) s0 s ((n + m0 ) mod 31) ( n) = ~ s ( m1 ) (n) = ~ s ((n + m ) mod 31) 1 1
where ~ s (i ) = 1 2 x(i ) , 0 i 30 , is defined by x(i + 5) = (x(i + 2) + x(i ) )mod 2, 0 i 25
with initial conditions x(0) = 0, x(1) = 0, x(2) = 0, x(3) = 0, x(4) = 1 .
The two scrambling sequences c0 (n) and c1 (n) depend on the primary synchronization signal and are defined by two ~ (n) according to different cyclic shifts of the m-sequence c
~ ((n + N ( 2) ) mod 31) c0 ( n ) = c ID ~ ((n + N ( 2) + 3) mod 31) c ( n) = c
1 ID ( 2) (1) {0,1,2} is the physical-layer identity within the physical-layer cell identity group N ID and where N ID ~ c (i ) = 1 2 x(i ) , 0 i 30 , is defined by
x(i + 5) = (x(i + 3) + x(i ) )mod 2,
0 i 25
3GPP
Release 8
59
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
( m0 ) ( m0 ) The scrambling sequences z1 (n) are z1 (n) are defined by a cyclic shift of the m-sequence ~ z (n) according to ( m0 ) z1 ( n) = ~ z ((n + (m0 mod 8)) mod 31) ( m1 ) z1 ( n) = ~ z ((n + (m1 mod 8)) mod 31)
z (i ) = 1 2 x(i ) , 0 i 30 , is defined by where m 0 and m1 are obtained from Table 6.11.2.1-1 and ~ x(i + 5) = (x(i + 4) + x(i + 2) + x(i + 1) + x(i ) )mod 2, 0 i 25
(1) Table 6.11.2.1-1: Mapping between physical-layer cell-identity group N ID and the indices m 0 and m1 . (1) N ID
m0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 0 1 2 3
m1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 3 4 5
(1) N ID
m0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
m1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
(1) N ID
m0
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
m1
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
(1) N ID
m0
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
m1
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
(1) N ID
m0
22 23 24 25 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0 1 2 -
m1
27 28 29 30 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 7 8 9 -
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135
136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 -
6.11.2.2
The mapping of the sequence to resource elements depends on the frame structure. In a subframe, the same antenna port as for the primary synchronization signal shall be used for the secondary synchronization signal. The sequence d (n ) shall be mapped to resource elements according to
3GPP
Release 8
60
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
ak ,l = d (n ), k = n 31 +
n = 0,...,61
DL RB N RB N sc
2 DL 2 in slots 0 and 10 for frame structure type 1 N l = symb DL N symb 1 in slots 1 and 11 for frame structure type 2
Resource elements (k , l ) where
k = n 31 +
DL RB N RB N sc 2
DL 2 in slots 0 and 10 for frame structure type 1 N l = symb DL N symb 1 in slots 1 and 11 for frame structure type 2 n = 5,4,...,1,62,63,...66
are reserved and not used for transmission of the secondary synchronization signal.
6.12
OFDM baseband signal generation

DL RB N sc / 2 N RB
The time-continuous signal sl( p ) (t ) on antenna port p in OFDM symbol l in a downlink slot is defined by
sl( p ) (t ) =
DL RB k = N RB N sc / 2
( p) ak e () ,l
j 2kf (t N CP ,l Ts )
k =1
( p) ak e (+) ,l
j 2kf (t N CP ,l Ts )
DL RB DL RB for 0 t < (N CP ,l + N ) Ts where k ( ) = k + N RB N sc 2 and k ( + ) = k + N RB N sc 2 1 . The variable N equals
2048 for f = 15 kHz subcarrier spacing and 4096 for f = 7.5 kHz subcarrier spacing. The OFDM symbols in a slot shall be transmitted in increasing order of l , starting with l = 0 , where OFDM symbol
l > 0 starts at time
l 1 l =0
( N CP ,l + N )Ts within the slot. In case the first OFDM symbol(s) in a slot use normal cyclic
prefix and the remaining OFDM symbols use extended cyclic prefix, the starting position the OFDM symbols with extended cyclic prefix shall be identical to those in a slot where all OFDM symbols use extended cyclic prefix. Thus there will be a part of the time slot between the two cyclic prefix regions where the transmitted signal is not specified. Table 6.12-1 lists the value of N CP,l that shall be used. Note that different OFDM symbols within a slot in some cases have different cyclic prefix lengths.
3GPP
Release 8
61
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 6.12-1: OFDM parameters.

Configuration Normal cyclic prefix Cyclic prefix length N CP ,l
f = 15 kHz f = 15 kHz f = 7.5 kHz
160 for l = 0 144 for l = 1,2,...,6

512 for l = 0,1,...,5
1024 for l = 0,1,2
6.13
Modulation and upconversion
Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for each antenna port is shown in Figure 6.13-1. The filtering required prior to transmission is defined by the requirements in [6].
cos (2f 0 t )
Re sl( p ) (t )
sl( p ) (t )
Im sl( p ) (t )
sin (2f 0t )
Figure 6.13-1: Downlink modulation.
7
7.1
Generic functions
Modulation mapper
The modulation mapper takes binary digits, 0 or 1, as input and produces complex-valued modulation symbols, x=I+jQ, as output.
7.1.1
BPSK
In case of BPSK modulation, a single bit0, b(i ) , is mapped to a complex-valued modulation symbol x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.1-1.
Table 7.1.1-1: BPSK modulation mapping
b(i )
0 1 I Q
1 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
3GPP
Release 8
62
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
7.1.2
QPSK
In case of QPSK modulation, pairs of bits, b(i ), b(i + 1) , are mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.2-1.
Table 7.1.2-1: QPSK modulation mapping
b(i ), b(i + 1)
00 01 10 11 I Q
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
7.1.3
16QAM
In case of 16QAM modulation, quadruplets of bits, b(i ), b(i + 1), b(i + 2), b(i + 3) , are mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.3-1.
Table 7.1.3-1: 16QAM modulation mapping
b(i ), b(i + 1), b(i + 2), b(i + 3)
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 I Q
1 10 1 10 3 3 10 10
1 10 3 10
1 10 3 3 3 10 1 10 10 1 10 10
1 10 1 10 3 3 10 10
1 10 1 10 3 3 10 10
1 10 3 10
1 10 3 3 3 10 1 10 10 1 10 10
1 10 1 10 3 3 10 10
7.1.4
64QAM
In case of 64QAM modulation, hextuplets of bits, b(i ), b(i + 1), b(i + 2), b(i + 3), b(i + 4), b(i + 5) , are mapped to complexvalued modulation symbols x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.4-1.
3GPP
Release 8
63
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 7.1.4-1: 64QAM modulation mapping

b (i ), b (i + 1), b (i + 2 ), b ( i + 3), b (i + 4 ), b ( i + 5)
b (i ), b (i + 1), b (i + 2 ), b (i + 3), b (i + 4 ), b ( i + 5)
000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 011010 011011 011100 011101 011110 011111
3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 5 5 7 7 5 5 7 7 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 5 5 7 7 5 5 7 7
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7 3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7 3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7 3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
100000 100001 100010 100011 100100 100101 100110 100111 101000 101001 101010 101011 101100 101101 101110 101111 110000 110001 110010 110011 110100 110101 110110 110111 111000 111001 111010 111011 111100 111101 111110 111111
3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 5 5 7 7 5 5 7 7 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 5 5 7 7 5 5 7 7
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7 3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7 3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7 3 1 3 1 5 7 5 7
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
7.2
Pseudo-random sequence generation
Pseudo-random sequences are defined by a length-31 Gold sequence. The output sequence c(n) of length M PN , where n = 0,1,..., M PN 1 , is defined by
3GPP
Release 8
64
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
x2 (n + 31) = (x 2 (n + 3) + x2 (n + 2) + x2 (n + 1) + x2 (n) ) mod 2
x1 (n + 31) = (x1 (n + 3) + x1 (n) ) mod 2
c(n) = (x1 (n) + x2 (n) ) mod 2
where the first m-sequence shall be initialised with x1 (0) = 1, x1 (n) = 0, n = 1,2,...,30 . The initialisation of the second msequence is denoted by cinit =
30
x (i ) 2 i =0 2
with the value depending on the application of the sequence.
8
8.1
Timing
Uplink-downlink frame timing
Transmission of the uplink radio frame number i from the UE shall start N TA Ts seconds before the start of the corresponding downlink radio frame at the UE. Note that not all slots in a radio frame may be transmitted. One example hereof is TDD, where only a subset of the slots in a radio frame is transmitted.
Downlink radio frame #i
Uplink radio frame #i

NTATS time units
Figure 8.1-1: Uplink-downlink timing relation
Annex A (informative): Change history

Change history
Date TSG # TSG Doc. CR 2006-09-24 2006-10-09 2006-10-13 2006-10-23 2006-11-06 2006-11-09 2006-11-10 2006-11-27 2006-12-14 2007-01-15 2007-01-19 2007-02-01 2007-02-12 2007-02-16 2007-02-16 2007-02-21 2007-03-03 RAN#35 RP-070169 2007-04-25 2007-05-03 2007-05-08 2007-05-11 2007-05-11 Rev Subject/Comment Draft version created Updated skeleton Endorsed by RAN1 Inclusion of decision from RAN1#46bis Updated editors version Updated editors version Endorsed by RAN1#47 Editors version, including decisions from RAN1#47 Updated editors version Updated editors version Endorsed by RAN1#47bis Editors version, including decisions from RAN1#47bis Updated editors version Endorsed by RAN1#48 Editors version, including decisions from RAN1#48 Updated editors version For information at RAN#35 Editors version, including decisions from RAN1#48bis and RAN1 TDD Ad Hoc - Updated editors version - Updated editors version - Updated editors version - Endorsed by RAN1#49 Old 0.0.0 0.0.1 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.1.2 0.1.3 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.2.2 0.2.3 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 0.4.0 0.4.1 0.4.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.0.3 1.0.4 New 0.0.0 0.0.1 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.1.2 0.1.3 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.2.2 0.2.3 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 0.4.0 0.4.1 0.4.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.0.3 1.0.4 1.1.0
3GPP
Release 8
2007-05-15 2007-06-05 2007-06-25 2007-07-10 2007-08-10 2007-08-20 2007-08-24 2007-08-27 2007-09-05 2007-09-08 12/09/07 28/11/07 28/11/07 RAN#37 RP-070729 RAN_37 RP-070729 RAN_38 RP-070949 0001 RAN_38 RP-070949 0002 -
65
3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

1.1.0 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.3.0 1.3.1 1.3.2 2.0.0 8.0.0 8.0.0 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.3.0 1.3.1 1.3.2 2.0.0 8.0.0 8.1.0 8.1.0
05/03/08
RAN_39 RP-080219 0003
Editors version, including decisions from RAN1#49 Updated editors version Endorsed by RAN1#49bis Editors version, including decisions from RAN1#49bis Updated editors version Updated editors version Endorsed by RAN1#50 Editors version, including decisions from RAN1#50 Updated editors version For approval at RAN#37 Approved version Introduction of optimized FS2 for TDD Introduction of scrambling sequences, uplink reference signal sequences, secondary synchronization sequences and control channel processing Update of uplink reference-signal hopping, downlink reference signals, scrambling sequences, DwPTS/UpPTS lengths for TDD and control channel processing
8.1.0
8.2.0
3GPP
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding (Release 8)
The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organizational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organizational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification. Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organizational Partners Publications Offices.
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Keywords
<keyword[, keyword]>
3GPP Postal address

650 Route des Lucioles Sophia Antipolis Valbonne France Tel. : +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax : +33 4 93 65 47 16
Internet
http://www.3gpp.org
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Contents
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................5 1 2 3
3.1 3.2 3.3

4
4.1 4.2
Mapping to physical channels ..................................................................................................................7

Uplink ................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Downlink ........................................................................................................................................................... 7
Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving .......................................................................................8
5.1 Generic procedures ............................................................................................................................................ 8 5.1.1 CRC calculation ........................................................................................................................................... 8 5.1.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment......................................................................... 9 5.1.3 Channel coding........................................................................................................................................... 10 5.1.3.1 Tail biting convolutional coding........................................................................................................... 11 5.1.3.2 Turbo coding ........................................................................................................................................ 12 5.1.3.2.1 Turbo encoder ................................................................................................................................. 12 5.1.3.2.2 Trellis termination for turbo encoder .............................................................................................. 13 5.1.3.2.3 Turbo code internal interleaver ....................................................................................................... 13 5.1.4 Rate matching............................................................................................................................................. 15 5.1.4.1 Rate matching for turbo coded transport channels ............................................................................... 15 5.1.4.1.1 Sub-block interleaver ...................................................................................................................... 15 5.1.4.1.2 Bit collection, selection and transmission ....................................................................................... 16 5.1.4.2 Rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information ........................ 17 5.1.4.2.1 Sub-block interleaver ...................................................................................................................... 18 5.1.4.2.2 Bit collection, selection and transmission ....................................................................................... 19 5.1.5 Code block concatenation .......................................................................................................................... 19 5.2 Uplink transport channels and control information ......................................................................................... 20 5.2.1 Random access channel.............................................................................................................................. 20 5.2.2 Uplink shared channel................................................................................................................................ 20 5.2.2.1 Transport block CRC attachment ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2.2.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment ................................................................. 21 5.2.2.3 Channel coding of UL-SCH ................................................................................................................. 22 5.2.2.4 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 22 5.2.2.5 Code block concatenation..................................................................................................................... 22 5.2.2.6 Channel coding of control information................................................................................................. 22 5.2.2.7 Data and control multiplexing .............................................................................................................. 23 5.2.2.8 Channel interleaver............................................................................................................................... 24 5.2.3 Uplink control information on PUCCH ..................................................................................................... 25 5.2.3.1 Channel coding for UCI HARQ-ACK.................................................................................................. 25 5.2.3.2 Channel coding for UCI scheduling request......................................................................................... 25 5.2.3.3 Channel coding for UCI channel quality information .......................................................................... 26 5.2.3.3.1 Channel quality information formats for wideband reports ............................................................ 26 5.2.3.3.2 Channel quality information formats for UE-selected sub-band reports......................................... 27 5.2.3.4 Channel coding for UCI channel quality information and HARQ-ACK.............................................. 28 5.3 Downlink transport channels and control information..................................................................................... 29 5.3.1 Broadcast channel ...................................................................................................................................... 29 5.3.1.1 Transport block CRC attachment ......................................................................................................... 29 5.3.1.2 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 30 5.3.1.3 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 30 5.3.2 Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel............................................................. 30 5.3.2.1 Transport block CRC attachment ......................................................................................................... 31 5.3.2.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment ................................................................. 31
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.3.2.3 5.3.2.4 5.3.2.5 5.3.3 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.1.1 5.3.3.1.2 5.3.3.1.3 5.3.3.1.4 5.3.3.1.5 5.3.3.1.6 5.3.3.2 5.3.3.3 5.3.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.4.1 5.3.5 5.3.5.1
Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 31 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 32 Code block concatenation..................................................................................................................... 32 Downlink control information.................................................................................................................... 32 DCI formats .......................................................................................................................................... 33 Format 0.......................................................................................................................................... 33 Format 1.......................................................................................................................................... 34 Format 1A ....................................................................................................................................... 34 Format 2.......................................................................................................................................... 35 Format 3.......................................................................................................................................... 35 Format 3A ....................................................................................................................................... 36 CRC attachment.................................................................................................................................... 36 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 36 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 36 Control format indicator............................................................................................................................. 36 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 37 HARQ indicator ......................................................................................................................................... 37 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 37
Annex <X> (informative):
Change history ...............................................................................................38
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Foreword
This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows: Version x.y.z where: x the first digit: 1 presented to TSG for information; 2 presented to TSG for approval; 3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control. Y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc. z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Scope
The present document specifies the coding, multiplexing and mapping to physical channels for E-UTRA.
References
References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or non-specific. For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply. For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same Release as the present document. [1] [2] [3] 3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications". 3GPP TS 36.211: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation". 3GPP TS 36.213: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures".
3
3.1

Definitions
For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in [1] and the following apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in [1]. Definition format <defined term>: <definition>.
3.2
DL N RB UL N RB PUSCH N symb
Symbols
Downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in number of resource blocks [2] Uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in number of resource blocks [2] Number of SC-FDMA symbols carrying PUSCH in a subframe Number of SC-FDMA symbols in an uplink slot Number of SC-FDMA symbols used for SRS transmission in a subframe (0 or 1).
UL N symb
N SRS
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
3.3
BCH CFI CP DCI DL-SCH FDD HI MCH PBCH PCFICH PCH PDCCH PDSCH PHICH PMCH PRACH PUCCH PUSCH RACH SRS TDD UCI UL-SCH
Abbreviations
Broadcast channel Control Format Indicator Cyclic Prefix Downlink Control Information Downlink Shared channel Frequency Division Duplexing HARQ indicator Multicast channel Physical Broadcast channel Physical Control Format Indicator channel Paging channel Physical Downlink Control channel Physical Downlink Shared channel Physical HARQ indicator channel Physical Multicast channel Physical Random Access channel Physical Uplink Control channel Physical Uplink Shared channel Random Access channel Sounding Reference Signal Time Division Duplexing Uplink Control Information Uplink Shared channel
For the purposes of the present document, the following abbreviations apply:
4
4.1
Mapping to physical channels

Uplink
Table 4.1-1 specifies the mapping of the uplink transport channels to their corresponding physical channels. Table 4.1-2 specifies the mapping of the uplink control channel information to its corresponding physical channel. Table 4.1-1
TrCH UL-SCH RACH Physical Channel PUSCH PRACH
Table 4.1-2
Control information UCI Physical Channel PUCCH, PUSCH
4.2
Downlink
Table 4.2-1 specifies the mapping of the downlink transport channels to their corresponding physical channels. Table 4.2-2 specifies the mapping of the downlink control channel information to its corresponding physical channel.
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 4.2-1
TrCH DL-SCH BCH PCH MCH Physical Channel PDSCH PBCH PDSCH PMCH
Table 4.2-2
Control information CFI HI DCI Physical Channel PCFICH PHICH PDCCH
Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving
Data and control streams from/to MAC layer are encoded /decoded to offer transport and control services over the radio transmission link. Channel coding scheme is a combination of error detection, error correcting, rate matching, interleaving and transport channel or control information mapping onto/splitting from physical channels.
5.1
5.1.1
Generic procedures
CRC calculation
This section contains coding procedures which are used for more than one transport channel or control information type.
Denote the input bits to the CRC computation by a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 , and the parity bits by p 0 , p1 , p 2 , p 3 ,..., p L 1 . A is the size of the input sequence and L is the number of parity bits. The parity bits are generated by one of the following cyclic generator polynomials: gCRC24A(D) = [D24 + D23 + D18 + D17 + D14 + D11 + D10 + D7 + D6 + D5 + D4 + D3 + D + 1] and; gCRC24B(D) = [D24 + D23 + D6 + D5 + D + 1] for a CRC length L = 24 and; gCRC16(D) = [D16 + D12 + D5 + 1] for a CRC length L = 16.
The encoding is performed in a systematic form, which means that in GF(2), the polynomial:
a 0 D A+ 23 + a1 D A+ 22 + ... + a A1 D 24 + p 0 D 23 + p1 D 22 + ... + p 22 D 1 + p 23
yields a remainder equal to 0 when divided by the corresponding length-24 CRC generator polynomial, gCRC24A(D) or gCRC24B(D), and the polynomial:
a 0 D A+15 + a1 D A+14 + ... + a A1 D 16 + p 0 D15 + p1 D 14 + ... + p14 D 1 + p15
yields a remainder equal to 0 when divided by gCRC16(D). The bits after CRC attachment are denoted by b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 , where B = A+ L. The relation between ak and bk is:
bk = a k bk = p k A
for k = 0, 1, 2, , A-1 for k = A, A+1, A+2,..., A+L-1.
3GPP
Release 8
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.1.2
Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment
The input bit sequence to the code block segmentation is denoted by b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 , where B > 0. If B is larger than the maximum code block size Z, segmentation of the input bit sequence is performed and an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 bits is attached to each code block. The maximum code block size is: -
Z = 6144.
If the number of filler bits F calculated below is not 0, filler bits are added to the beginning of the first block. Note that if B < 40, filler bits are added to the beginning of the code block. The filler bits shall be set to <NULL> at the input to the encoder. Total number of code blocks C is determined by: if B Z
L=0
Number of code blocks: C = 1
B = B
else
L = 24
Number of code blocks: C = B / (Z L ) .
B = B + C L
end if The bits output from code block segmentation, for C 0, are denoted by c r 0 , c r1 , c r 2 , c r 3 ,..., c r (K r 1) , where r is the code block number, and Kr is the number of bits for the code block number r. Number of bits in each code block (applicable for C 0 only): First segmentation size: K + = minimum K in table 5.1.3-3 such that C K B if C = 1 the number of code blocks with length K + is C + =1, K = 0 , C = 0 else if C > 1 Second segmentation size: K = maximum K in table 5.1.3-3 such that K < K +
K = K+ K C K + B Number of segments of size K : C = . K
Number of segments of size K + : C + = C C . end if Number of filler bits: F = C + K + + C K B for k = 0 to F-1

c 0 k =< NULL >
-- Insertion of filler bits
3GPP
Release 8
10
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
end for
k=F s=0
for r = 0 to C-1 if r < C
Kr = K
else
Kr = K+
end if while k < K r L

c rk = b s k = k +1 s = s +1
end while if C >1 The sequence c r 0 , c r1 , c r 2 , c r 3 ,..., c r (K r L 1) is used to calculate the CRC parity bits p r 0 , p r1 , p r 2 ,..., p r (L1) according to subclause 5.1.1 with the generator polynomial gCRC24B(D). For CRC calculation it is assumed that filler bits, if present, have the value 0. while k < K r
crk = pr ( k + L K r )
k = k +1 end while
end if k =0 end for
5.1.3
Channel coding
The bit sequence input for a given code block to channel coding is denoted by c 0 , c1 , c 2 , c 3 ,..., c K 1 , where K is the
(i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) number of bits to encode. After encoding the bits are denoted by d 0 , d 1(i ) , d 2 , d3 ,..., d D 1 , where D is the number of
(i ) encoded bits per output stream and i indexes the encoder output stream. The relation between c k and d k and between
K and D is dependent on the channel coding scheme. The following channel coding schemes can be applied to TrCHs: tail biting convolutional coding; turbo coding.
Usage of coding scheme and coding rate for the different types of TrCH is shown in table 5.1.3-1. Usage of coding scheme and coding rate for the different control information types is shown in table 5.1.3-2. The values of D in connection with each coding scheme: tail biting convolutional coding with rate 1/3: D = K;
3GPP
Release 8
11
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
turbo coding with rate 1/3: D = K + 4.
The range for the output stream index i is 0, 1 and 2 for both coding schemes.
Table 5.1.3-1: Usage of channel coding scheme and coding rate for TrCHs
TrCH UL-SCH DL-SCH PCH MCH BCH Coding scheme Turbo coding Tail biting convolutional coding Coding rate 1/3
1/3
Table 5.1.3-2: Usage of channel coding scheme and coding rate for control information
Control Information DCI CFI HI UCI Coding scheme Tail biting convolutional coding Block code Repetition code Block code Tail biting convolutional coding Coding rate 1/3 1/16 1/3 variable 1/3
5.1.3.1
Tail biting convolutional coding
A tail biting convolutional code with constraint length 7 and coding rate 1/3 is defined. The configuration of the convolutional encoder is presented in figure 5.1.3-1. The initial value of the shift register of the encoder shall be set to the values corresponding to the last 6 information bits in the input stream so that the initial and final states of the shift register are the same. Therefore, denoting the shift register of the encoder by s 0 , s1 , s 2 ,..., s 5 , then the initial value of the shift register shall be set to
s i = c (K 1i )
ck
( 0) dk
(1) dk
( 2) dk
Figure 5.1.3-1: Rate 1/3 tail biting convolutional encoder

(1) ( 2) (0) The encoder output streams d k , dk and d k correspond to the first, second and third parity streams, respectively as
shown in Figure 5.1.3-1.
3GPP
Release 8
12
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.1.3.2
5.1.3.2.1
Turbo coding
Turbo encoder
The scheme of turbo encoder is a Parallel Concatenated Convolutional Code (PCCC) with two 8-state constituent encoders and one turbo code internal interleaver. The coding rate of turbo encoder is 1/3. The structure of turbo encoder is illustrated in figure 5.1.3-2. The transfer function of the 8-state constituent code for the PCCC is: G(D) = 1, where g0(D) = 1 + D2 + D3, g1(D) = 1 + D + D3. The initial value of the shift registers of the 8-state constituent encoders shall be all zeros when starting to encode the input bits. The output from the turbo encoder is
( 0) dk = xk
(1) dk = zk ( 2) dk = z k
g1 ( D ) , g 0 ( D)
for k = 0,1,2,..., K 1 . If the code block to be encoded is the 0-th code block and the number of filler bits is greater than zero, i.e., F > 0, then
(0) the encoder shall set ck, = 0, k = 0,,(F-1) at its input and shall set d k =< NULL > , k = 0,,(F-1) and (1) dk =< NULL > , k = 0,,(F-1) at its output.
The bits input to the turbo encoder are denoted by c 0 , c1 , c 2 , c 3 ,..., c K 1 , and the bits output from the first and second 8 , z1 , z2 , z3 ,..., z state constituent encoders are denoted by z 0 , z1 , z 2 , z 3 ,..., z K 1 and z 0 K 1 , respectively. The bits output , c1 ,..., c from the turbo code internal interleaver are denoted by c0 K 1 , and these bits are to be the input to the second 8state constituent encoder.
3GPP
Release 8
13
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
xk
zk
ck
z k ck
x k
Figure 5.1.3-2: Structure of rate 1/3 turbo encoder (dotted lines apply for trellis termination only)
5.1.3.2.2
Trellis termination for turbo encoder
Trellis termination is performed by taking the tail bits from the shift register feedback after all information bits are encoded. Tail bits are padded after the encoding of information bits. The first three tail bits shall be used to terminate the first constituent encoder (upper switch of figure 5.1.3-2 in lower position) while the second constituent encoder is disabled. The last three tail bits shall be used to terminate the second constituent encoder (lower switch of figure 5.1.3-2 in lower position) while the first constituent encoder is disabled. The transmitted bits for trellis termination shall then be:
( 0) ( 0) (0) ( 0) dK = xK , d K +1 = z K +1 , d K + 2 = x K , d K + 3 = z K +1 (1) (1) (1) (1) dK = zK , dK +1 = x K + 2 , d K + 2 = z K , d K + 3 = x K + 2 ( 2) ( 2) ( 2) ( 2) dK = x K +1 , d K +1 = z K + 2 , d K + 2 = x K +1 , d K +3 = z K + 2
5.1.3.2.3
Turbo code internal interleaver
The bits input to the turbo code internal interleaver are denoted by c 0 , c1 ,..., c K 1 , where K is the number of input bits. , c1 ,..., c The bits output from the turbo code internal interleaver are denoted by c0 K 1 . The relationship between the input and output bits is as follows:
c i = c (i ) , i=0, 1,, (K-1)
3GPP
Release 8
14
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
where the relationship between the output index i and the input index (i ) satisfies the following quadratic form:
(i ) = f1 i + f 2 i 2 mod K
The parameters f1 and f 2 depend on the block size K and are summarized in Table 5.1.3-3.
Table 5.1.3-3: Turbo code internal interleaver parameters
i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Ki 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192 200 208 216 224 232 240 248 256 264 272 280 288 296 304 312 320 328 336 344 352 360 368 376 384 392 400 408
f1
3 7 19 7 7 11 5 11 7 41 103 15 9 17 9 21 101 21 57 23 13 27 11 27 85 29 33 15 17 33 103 19 19 37 19 21 21 115 193 21 133 81 45 23 243 151 155
f2
10 12 42 16 18 20 22 24 26 84 90 32 34 108 38 120 84 44 46 48 50 52 36 56 58 60 62 32 198 68 210 36 74 76 78 120 82 84 86 44 90 46 94 48 98 40 102
i 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94
Ki 416 424 432 440 448 456 464 472 480 488 496 504 512 528 544 560 576 592 608 624 640 656 672 688 704 720 736 752 768 784 800 816 832 848 864 880 896 912 928 944 960 976 992 1008 1024 1056 1088
f1
25 51 47 91 29 29 247 29 89 91 157 55 31 17 35 227 65 19 37 41 39 185 43 21 155 79 139 23 217 25 17 127 25 239 17 137 215 29 15 147 29 59 65 55 31 17 171
f2
52 106 72 110 168 114 58 118 180 122 62 84 64 66 68 420 96 74 76 234 80 82 252 86 44 120 92 94 48 98 80 102 52 106 48 110 112 114 58 118 60 122 124 84 64 66 204
i 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141
Ki 1120 1152 1184 1216 1248 1280 1312 1344 1376 1408 1440 1472 1504 1536 1568 1600 1632 1664 1696 1728 1760 1792 1824 1856 1888 1920 1952 1984 2016 2048 2112 2176 2240 2304 2368 2432 2496 2560 2624 2688 2752 2816 2880 2944 3008 3072 3136
f1
67 35 19 39 19 199 21 211 21 43 149 45 49 71 13 17 25 183 55 127 27 29 29 57 45 31 59 185 113 31 17 171 209 253 367 265 181 39 27 127 143 43 29 45 157 47 13
f2
140 72 74 76 78 240 82 252 86 88 60 92 846 48 28 80 102 104 954 96 110 112 114 116 354 120 610 124 420 64 66 136 420 216 444 456 468 80 164 504 172 88 300 92 188 96 28
i 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188
Ki 3200 3264 3328 3392 3456 3520 3584 3648 3712 3776 3840 3904 3968 4032 4096 4160 4224 4288 4352 4416 4480 4544 4608 4672 4736 4800 4864 4928 4992 5056 5120 5184 5248 5312 5376 5440 5504 5568 5632 5696 5760 5824 5888 5952 6016 6080 6144
f1
111 443 51 51 451 257 57 313 271 179 331 363 375 127 31 33 43 33 477 35 233 357 337 37 71 71 37 39 127 39 39 31 113 41 251 43 21 43 45 45 161 89 323 47 23 47 263
f2
240 204 104 212 192 220 336 228 232 236 120 244 248 168 64 130 264 134 408 138 280 142 480 146 444 120 152 462 234 158 80 96 902 166 336 170 86 174 176 178 120 182 184 186 94 190 480
3GPP
Release 8
15
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.1.4
5.1.4.1
Rate matching
Rate matching for turbo coded transport channels
The rate matching for turbo coded transport channels is defined per coded block and consists of interleaving the three
(0) (1) ( 2) , dk and d k , followed by the collection of bits and the generation of a circular buffer as information bit streams d k
depicted in Figure 5.1.4-1. The output bits for each code block are transmitted as described in subclause 5.1.4.1.2.
( 0) dk
( 0) vk
(1) dk
(1) vk
wk
ek
( 2) dk
( 2) vk
Figure 5.1.4-1. Rate matching for turbo coded transport channels

( 0) The bit stream d k is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1 with an output ( 0) ( 0) ( 0) ( 0) sequence defined as v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K and where K is defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1. 1
(1) is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1 with an output The bit stream d k (1) (1) (1) (1) sequence defined as v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K
1
( 2) The bit stream d k is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1 with an output
( 2) ( 2) ( 2) ( 2) sequence defined as v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K . 1
The sequence of bits e k for transmission is generated according to subclause 5.1.4.1.2.
5.1.4.1.1
Sub-block interleaver
(i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) , d1 ,d2 ,..., d D The bits input to the block interleaver are denoted by d 0 1 , where D is the number of bits. The output bit sequence from the block interleaver is derived as follows:
TC = 32 to be the number of columns of the matrix. The columns of the matrix are numbered 0, 1, (1) Assign C subblock TC 1 from left to right. 2,, C subblock TC , by finding minimum integer Rsubblock such that: (2) Determine the number of rows of the matrix Rsubblock TC TC D Rsubblock C subblock TC
TC The rows of rectangular matrix are numbered 0, 1, 2,, Rsubblock 1 from top to bottom.
3GPP
Release 8
16
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
TC TC TC TC (3) If Rsubblock C subblock > D , then N D = Rsubblock C subblock D dummy bits are padded such that yk = <NULL>
(i ) , k = 0, 1,, D-1, into for k = 0, 1,, ND - 1. Then, write the input bit sequence, i.e. y N D + k = d k TC TC the Rsubblock C subblock matrix row by row starting with bit y0 in column 0 of row 0:
y0 yCTC subblock y( RTC TC subblock 1)Csubblock

( 0) (1) For d k and d k :
y1 yCTC y ( RTC
subblock +1
y2 yCTC y( RTC
subblock + 2
TC subblock 1)Csubblock +1
TC subblock 1)Csubblock + 2
y 2CTC subblock 1 y( RTC CTC subblock subblock 1)
yCTC
subblock 1
(4) Perform the inter-column permutation for the matrix based on the pattern P ( j )
TC j 0,1,...,Csubblock 1
} that is shown in
table 5.1.4-1, where P(j) is the original column position of the j-th permuted column. After permutation of the TC TC columns, the inter-column permuted Rsubblock C subblock matrix is equal to
y P ( 0) y P (0)+CTC subblock y P ( 0)+( RTC TC subblock 1)Csubblock
y P (1) y P (1)+CTC
y P ( 2) y P ( 2)+CTC

y P (1)+( RTC
subblock

y P ( 2)+( RTC
subblock
TC subblock 1)Csubblock
TC subblock 1)Csubblock
y P (CTC TC subblock 1) +Csubblock y P (CTC TC TC subblock 1) +( Rsubblock 1)Csubblock
y P (CTC
subblock 1)
(5) The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from the inter-column
(i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) TC TC C subblock matrix. The bits after sub-block interleaving are denoted by v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K permuted Rsubblock (i ) (i ) where v 0 corresponds to y P ( 0) , v1 to y P (0)+CTC TC TC and K = Rsubblock C subblock .
subblock
( 2) For d k :
( 2) ( 2) ( 2) ( 2) ( 2) (4) The output of the sub-block interleaver is denoted by v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K , where v k = y ( k ) and where 1
(k )= P
k TC + C TC k mod Rsubblock + 1 mod K subblock TC R subblock
The permutation function P is defined in Table 5.1.4-1.

Table 5.1.4-1 Inter-column permutation pattern for sub-block interleaver
Number of columns
TC C subblock
Inter-column permutation pattern

TC < P(0), P (1),..., P(C subblock 1) >
32
< 0, 16, 8, 24, 4, 20, 12, 28, 2, 18, 10, 26, 6, 22, 14, 30, 1, 17, 9, 25, 5, 21, 13, 29, 3, 19, 11, 27, 7, 23, 15, 31 >
5.1.4.1.2
Bit collection, selection and transmission
The circular buffer of length K w = 3K for the r-th coded block is generated as follows:
( 0) wk = v k
(1) w K + 2k = v k
for k = 0,, K 1 for k = 0,, K 1
3GPP
Release 8
( 2) w K + 2 k +1 = v k for k = 0,, K 1
17
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Denote the soft buffer size for the transport block by NIR bits and the soft buffer size for the r-th code block by Ncb bits. NIR is signalled by higher layers. The size Ncb is obtained as follows, where C is the number of code blocks computed in subclause 5.1.2:
N IR - N cb = min C , K w - N cb = K w
for downlink turbo coded transport channels for uplink turbo coded transport channels
Denoting by E the rate matching output sequence length for the r-th coded block, and rvidx the redundancy version number for this transmission (rvidx = 0, 1, 2 or 3), the rate matching output bit sequence is ek , k = 0,1,..., E 1 . Define by G the total number of bits available for the transmission of one transport block. Set G = G (N L Qm ) where Qm is equal to 2 for QPSK, 4 for 16QAM and 6 for 64QAM, and where NL is equal to 1 for blocks mapped onto one transmission layer and is equal to 2 for blocks mapped onto two or four transmission layers. Set = G mod C , where C is the number of code blocks computed in subclause 5.1.2. if r C 1 set E = N L Q m G / C else set E = N L Q m G / C end if
N TC 2 TCcb Set k 0 = R subblock 8R subblock TC rv idx + 2 , where R subblock is the number of rows defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1.
Set k = 0 and j = 0 while { k < E } if w( k0 + j ) mod Ncb < NULL >

ek = w( k0 + j ) mod Ncb
k = k +1 end if j = j +1 end while
5.1.4.2
Rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information
The rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information consists of interleaving the
( 0) (1) ( 2) , dk and d k , followed by the collection of bits and the generation of a circular buffer as three bit streams, d k
depicted in Figure 5.1.4-2. The output bits are transmitted as described in subclause 5.1.4.2.2.
3GPP
Release 8
18
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
( 0) dk
( 0) vk
(1) dk
(1) vk
wk
ek
( 2) dk
( 2) vk
Figure 5.1.4-2. Rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information
( 0) The bit stream d k is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver defined in subclause 5.1.4.2.1 with an output ( 0) ( 0) ( 0) ( 0) sequence defined as v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K and where K is defined in subclause 5.1.4.2.1. 1
(1) The bit stream d k is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver defined in subclause 5.1.4.2.1 with an output (1) (1) (1) (1) sequence defined as v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K
1
( 2) is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver defined in subclause 5.1.4.2.1 with an output The bit stream d k
( 2) ( 2) ( 2) ( 2) sequence defined as v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K . 1
The sequence of bits e k for transmission is generated according to subclause 5.1.4.2.2.
5.1.4.2.1
Sub-block interleaver
(i ) (i ) (i ) , d1(i ) , d 2 ,..., d D The bits input to the block interleaver are denoted by d 0 1 , where D is the number of bits. The output bit sequence from the block interleaver is derived as follows: CC = 32 to be the number of columns of the matrix. The columns of the matrix are numbered 0, 1, (1) Assign C subblock CC 1 from left to right. 2,, C subblock CC CC (2) Determine the number of rows of the matrix R subblock , by finding minimum integer R subblock such that: CC CC D R subblock C subblock
)
1 from top to bottom.
The rows of rectangular matrix are numbered 0, 1, 2,, Rsubblock
CC
CC CC CC CC C subblock > D , then N D = R subblock C subblock D dummy bits are padded such that yk = <NULL> (3) If R subblock (i ) , k = 0, 1,, D-1, into for k = 0, 1,, ND - 1. Then, write the input bit sequence, i.e. y N D + k = d k CC CC the Rsubblock C subblock matrix row by row starting with bit y0 in column 0 of row 0:
y0 yC CC subblock y CC CC ( Rsubblock 1)C subblock
y1 yC CC y( R CC
subblock +1
y2 yC CC y( R CC
subblock + 2
CC subblock 1) C subblock +1
CC subblock 1) C subblock + 2
y2C CC 1 subblock y( R CC C CC subblock subblock 1) yC CC

subblock 1
3GPP
Release 8
19
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
(4) Perform the inter-column permutation for the matrix based on the pattern P ( j )
CC j 0,1,...,Csubblock 1
} that is shown in
table 5.1.4-2, where P(j) is the original column position of the j-th permuted column. After permutation of the CC CC columns, the inter-column permuted Rsubblock C subblock matrix is equal to
y P (0) y P ( 0)+C CC subblock y P (0)+( RCC 1)C CC subblock subblock
y P (1) y P (1)+C CC y P (1)+( RCC

subblock
y P ( 2) y P ( 2)+C CC y P ( 2)+( RCC

subblock
CC subblock 1)Csubblock
CC subblock 1)Csubblock
CC subblock 1) +Csubblock y P (C CC 1)+( RCC 1)C CC subblock subblock subblock y P (C CC

subblock 1)
y P (C CC
(5) The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from the inter-column
(i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) CC CC C subblock matrix. The bits after sub-block interleaving are denoted by v 0 , v1 , v2 ,..., v K permuted Rsubblock (i ) (i ) where v 0 corresponds to y P ( 0) , v1 to y P ( 0)+C CC CC CC and K = Rsubblock C subblock
subblock
Table 5.1.4-2 Inter-column permutation pattern for sub-block interleaver

Number of columns
CC C subblock
Inter-column permutation pattern

CC < P(0), P (1),..., P(C subblock 1) >
32
< 1, 17, 9, 25, 5, 21, 13, 29, 3, 19, 11, 27, 7, 23, 15, 31, 0, 16, 8, 24, 4, 20, 12, 28, 2, 18, 10, 26, 6, 22, 14, 30 >
5.1.4.2.2
Bit collection, selection and transmission
The circular buffer of length K w = 3K is generated as follows:

( 0) wk = v k
(1) wK +k = v k ( 2) w2 K + k = v k
for k = 0,, K 1 for k = 0,, K 1 for k = 0,, K 1
Denoting by E the rate matching output sequence length, the rate matching output bit sequence is ek , k = 0,1,..., E 1 . Set k = 0 and j = 0 while { k < E } if w j mod K w < NULL >
ek = w j mod K w
k = k +1 end if j = j +1 end while
5.1.5
Code block concatenation
The input bit sequence for the code block concatenation and channel interleaving block are the sequences e rk , for r = 0,..., C 1 and k = 0,..., E r 1 . The output bit sequence from the code block concatenation and channel interleaving block is the sequence f k for k = 0,..., G 1 .
3GPP
Release 8
20
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
The code block concatenation consists of sequentially concatenating the rate matching outputs for the different code blocks. Therefore, Set k = 0 and r = 0 while r < C Set j = 0 while j < E r
f k = e rj
k = k +1
j = j +1
end while
r = r +1
end while
5.2
5.2.1
Uplink transport channels and control information

Random access channel
The sequence index for the random access channel is received from higher layers and is processed according to [2].
5.2.2
Uplink shared channel
Figure 5.2.2-1 shows the processing structure for the UL-SCH transport channel. Data arrives to the coding unit in form of a maximum of one transport block every transmission time interval (TTI). The following coding steps can be identified: Add CRC to the transport block Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment Channel coding of data and control information Rate matching Code block concatenation Multiplexing of data and control information Channel interleaver
The coding steps for UL-SCH transport channel are shown in the figure below.
3GPP
Release 8
21
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
a0 , a1 ,..., a A 1
Transport block CRC attachment

b0 , b1 ,..., b B 1
Code block segmentation Code block CRC attachment

cr 0 , cr1 ,..., cr (K r 1)
Channel coding
(i ) (i ) (i ) dr 0 , d r1 ,..., d r ( D
r 1)
Rate matching
o0 , o1 ,..., oO 1
ACK ACK [o0 ] or [o1ACK o0 ]
er 0 , er1 ,..., er (Er 1)

f 0 , f1 ,..., f G 1
Channel coding
Channel coding
ACK ACK q0 , q1ACK ,..., qQ ACK 1
q 0 , q1 ,..., q Q 1
Data and Control multiplexing
g 0 , g1 ,..., g H 1
Channel interleaver
h0 , h1 ,..., hH 1
Figure 5.2.2-1: Transport channel processing for UL-SCH
5.2.2.1
Error detection is provided on UL-SCH transport blocks through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). The entire transport block is used to calculate the CRC parity bits. Denote the bits in a transport block delivered to layer 1 by a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 , and the parity bits by p 0 , p1 , p 2 , p 3 ,..., p L 1 . A is the size of the transport block and L is the number of parity bits. The parity bits are computed and attached to the UL-SCH transport block according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to 24 bits and using the generator polynomial gCRC24A(D).
5.2.2.2
The bits input to the code block segmentation are denoted by b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 where B is the number of bits in the transport block (including CRC).
3GPP
Release 8
22
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment are performed according to subclause 5.1.2. The bits after code block segmentation are denoted by c r 0 , c r1 , c r 2 , c r 3 ,..., c r (K r 1) , where r is the code block number and Kr is the number of bits for code block number r.
5.2.2.3
Channel coding of UL-SCH
Code blocks are delivered to the channel coding block. The bits in a code block are denoted by c r 0 , c r1 , c r 2 , c r 3 ,..., c r (K r 1) , where r is the code block number, and Kr is the number of bits in code block number r. The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each code block is individually turbo encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.2.
i) i) (i ) , d r(i2) , d r(3 ,..., d r After encoding the bits are denoted by d r(i0) , d r(1 ( Dr 1) , with i = 0,1, and 2 and where Dr is the number of bits on the i-th coded stream for code block number r, i.e. Dr = K r + 4 .
5.2.2.4
Rate matching
i) i) (i ) Turbo coded blocks are delivered to the rate matching block. They are denoted by d r(i0) , d r(1 , d r(i2) , d r(3 ,..., d r ( Dr 1) , with i = 0,1, and 2 , and where r is the code block number, i is the coded stream index, and Dr is the number of bits in each coded stream of code block number r. The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each coded block is individually rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.1.
After rate matching, the bits are denoted by er 0 , er1 , er 2 , er 3 ,..., er (Er 1) , where r is the coded block number, and where
E r is the number of rate matched bits for code block number r.
5.2.2.5
The bits input to the code block concatenation block are denoted by er 0 , er1 , er 2 , er 3 ,..., er (Er 1) for r = 0,..., C 1 and where E r is the number of rate matched bits for the r-th code block. Code block concatenation is performed according to subclause 5.1.5. The bits after code block concatenation are denoted by f 0 , f1, f 2 , f3 ,..., fG 1 , where G is the total number of coded bits for transmission excluding the bits used for control transmission, when control information is multiplexed with the ULSCH transmission.
5.2.2.6
Channel coding of control information
The coding rate of the control information when multiplexed with the data transmission is given by the modulation scheme and the coding rate used for the UL-SCH transmission. Different coding rates for the control information are achieved by allocating different number of coded symbols for its transmission. When multiplexed with the data transmission in the uplink shared data channel, the channel coding for HARQ-ACK and channel quality information o 0 , o1 , o 2 ,..., oO 1 is done independently. For HARQ-ACK information
ACK If HARQ-ACK consists of 1-bit of information, i.e., [o 0 ] , it is first encoded according to Table 5.2.2-1. ACK If HARQ-ACK consists of 2-bits of information, i.e., [o1ACK o 0 ] , it is first encoded according to Table 5.2.2-2.
3GPP
Release 8
23
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.2.2-1: Encoding of 1-bit HARQ-ACK

Qm 2 4 6 Encoded HARQ-ACK
ACK [o 0 x] ACK [o 0 x x x] ACK [o 0 xxxxx]
Table 5.2.2-2: Encoding of 2-bit HARQ-ACK

Qm 2 4 6 Encoded HARQ-ACK
ACK [o1ACK o 0 ] ACK [o1ACK o 0 x x] ACK [o1ACK o 0 x x x x]
[Note from the editor: the x above is a placeholder for 211 to treat bits with this value differently when performing scrambling of coded bits. This will enable limiting the constellation size used for ACK transmission in PUSCH to QPSK.]
ACK ACK ACK , q1ACK , q 2 ,..., q Q is obtained by concatenation of multiple encoded HARQ-ACK blocks The bit sequence q 0 ACK 1
where Q ACK is the total number of coded bit for all the encoded HARQ-ACK blocks. The vector sequence output of the channel coding for HARQ-ACK information is denoted by q ACK , q ACK ,..., q ACK
0 1 Q ACK 1
, where Q ACK = Q ACK / Q m , and
is obtained as follows: Set i ,k to 0 while i < QACK

T q ACK = [q iACK ...q iACK + Qm 1 ] k
i = i + Qm
k = k +1 end while For channel quality control information If the payload size is less than or equal to 11 bits, the channel coding of the channel quality information is performed according to subclause 5.2.3.3 with input sequence o 0 , o1 , o 2 ,..., oO 1 . For payload sizes greater than 11 bits, the channel coding and rate matching of the channel quality information is performed according to subclause 5.1.3.1 and 5.1.4.2 with input sequence o 0 , o1 , o 2 ,..., oO 1 .
The output sequence for the channel coding of channel quality information is denoted by q0 , q1, q2 , q3 ,..., qQ 1 .
5.2.2.7
Data and control multiplexing
The control and data multiplexing is performed such that HARQ-ACK information is present on both slots and is mapped to resources around the demodulation reference signals. In addition, the multiplexing ensures that control and data information are mapped to different modulation symbols. The inputs to the data and control multiplexing are the coded bits of the control information denoted by q0 , q1, q2 , q3 ,..., qQ 1 and the coded bits of the UL-SCH denoted by f 0 , f 1 , f 2 , f 3 ,..., f G 1 . The output of the data and
3GPP
Release 8
24
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
control multiplexing operation is denoted by g , g , g , g ,..., g

0 1 2 3 i
H 1
, where H = (G + Q ) and H = H / Q m , and
where g , i = 0,..., H 1 are column vectors of length Q m . H is the total number of coded bits for transmission.
PUSCH UL Denote the number of SC-FDMA symbols per subframe for PUSCH transmission by N symb = 2 N symb 1 N SRS .
( (
The control information and the data shall be multiplexed as follows: Set i, j, k to 0
while j < Q -- first place the control information

g = [q j ... q j +Qm 1 ]T
k
j = j + Qm k = k +1
end while
while i < G -- then place the data

g = [ f i ... f i + Qm 1 ]T
k
i = i + Qm
k = k +1 end while
5.2.2.8
Channel interleaver
The channel interleaver described in this subclause in conjunction with the resource element mapping for PUSCH in [2] implements a time-first mapping of modulation symbols onto the transmit waveform while ensuring that the HARQACK information is present on both slots in the subframe and is mapped to resources around the uplink demodulation reference signals. The bits input to the channel interleaver are denoted by g , g , g ,..., g
0 1 2 H 1
, where H is the number of modulation
symbols in the subframe. The output bit sequence from the channel interleaver is derived as follows:
PUSCH (1) Assign C mux = N symb to be the number of columns of the matrix. The columns of the matrix are numbered 0,
1, 2,, C mux 1 from left to right.

= Rmux / Qm . (2) The number of rows of the matrix is R mux = H / C mux and we define Rmux
The rows of the rectangular matrix are numbered 0, 1, 2,, R mux 1 from top to bottom. (3) Write the input vector sequence, i.e., y = g for k = 0, 1,, H 1 , into the (R mux C mux ) matrix by sets of Qm rows starting with the vector y in column 0 and rows 0 to (Q m 1) :
0 k k
3GPP
Release 8
25
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
y 0 y C mux y ( Rmux 1)C mux
y y y
y y y
C mux +1
C mux + 2
1)C mux +1 ( Rmux
1)C mux + 2 ( Rmux
y 2C mux 1 y ( Rmux C mux 1) y

C mux 1
(4) If HARQ-ACK information is transmitted in this subframe, the vector sequence q ACK , q ACK , q ACK ,..., q ACK
0 1 2
Q ACK 1
is written onto the columns indicated by Table 5.2.2.8-1, and by sets of Qm rows starting from the last row and moving upwards. Note that this operation overwrites some of the channel interleaver entries obtained in step (3). (5)The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from the (R mux C mux ) matrix. The bits after channel interleaving are denoted by h0 , h1 , h2 ,..., h H 1 .
Table 5.2.2.8-1: Column set for Insertion of HARQ-ACK information
CP configuration Normal SRS configuration No SRS First SC-FDMA symbol Last SC-FDMA symbol No SRS First SC-FDMA symbol Last SC-FDMA symbol Column Set {2, 3, 8, 9} {1, 2, 7, 8} {2, 3, 8, 9} {2, 3, 7, 8} {1, 2, 6, 7} {2, 3, 7, 8}
Extended
5.2.3
Uplink control information on PUCCH
Data arrives to the coding unit in form of indicators for measurement indication, scheduling request and HARQ acknowledgement. Three forms of channel coding are used, one for the channel quality information (CQI), another for HARQ-ACK (acknowledgement) and scheduling request and another for combination of channel quality information (CQI) and HARQ-ACK.
a0 , a1 ,..., a A1
b0 , b1 ,..., b B 1
Figure 5.2.3-1: Processing for UCI
5.2.3.1
Channel coding for UCI HARQ-ACK
The HARQ acknowledgement bits are received from higher layers. Each positive acknowledgement (ACK) is encoded as a binary 0 and each negative acknowledgement (NAK) is encoded as a binary 1. The HARQ-ACK bits are processed according to [2].
5.2.3.2
Channel coding for UCI scheduling request
The scheduling request indication is received from higher layers and is processed according to [2].
3GPP
Release 8
26
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.2.3.3
Channel coding for UCI channel quality information
The channel quality bits input to the channel coding block are denoted by a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 where A is the number of bits. The number of channel quality bits depends on the transmission format as indicated in subclause 5.2.3.3.1 for wideband reports and in subclause 5.2.3.3.2 for UE-selected subbands reports. The channel quality indication is coded using a (20, A) code. The code words of the (20, A) code are a linear combination of the [14] basis sequences denoted Mi,n and defined in Table 5.2.3.3-1.
Table 5.2.3.3-1: Basis sequences for (20, A) code
i 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Mi,0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mi,1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 Mi,2 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Mi,3 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 Mi,4 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 Mi,5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mi,6 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Mi,7 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 Mi,8 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Mi,9 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 Mi,10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Mi,11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Mi,12 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Mi,13 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
After encoding the bits are denoted by b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 where B = 20 and with
bi =
n =0
(a n M i,n ) mod 2 where i = 0, 1, 2, , B-1.

Channel quality information formats for wideband reports
A1
5.2.3.3.1
Table 5.2.3.3.1-1 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the channel quality information feedback for wideband reports for PDSCH transmissions over a single antenna port or with open loop spatial multiplexing.
Table 5.2.3.3.1-1: UCI fields for channel quality information (CQI) feedback for wideband reports (single antenna port or open loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)
Field Wide-band CQI Bitwidth 4
Table 5.2.3.3.1-2 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the channel quality and precoding matrix information feedback for wideband reports for PDSCH transmissions with closed loop spatial multiplexing.
3GPP
Release 8
27
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.2.3.3.1-2: UCI fields for channel quality and precoding information (CQI/PMI) feedback for wideband reports (closed loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)
Field Wide-band CQI Spatial differential CQI Precoding matrix indication Bitwidths 2 antenna ports 4 antenna ports Rank = 1 Rank = 2 Rank = 1 Rank > 1 4 4 4 4 0 3 0 3 2 or 3 1 or 2 4 4
Table 5.2.3.3.1-3 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the rank indication feedback for wideband reports for PDSCH transmissions for open and closed loop spatial multiplexing.
Table 5.2.3.3.1-3: UCI fields for rank indication (RI) feedback for wideband reports
Field Rank indication Bitwidths 4 antenna ports Max 2 layers Max 4 layers 1 2
2 antenna ports 1
The channel quality bits in Table 5.2.3.3.1-1 through Table 5.2.3.3.1-3 form the bit sequence a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 with a 0 corresponding to the first bit of the first field in each of the tables, a1 corresponding to the second bit of the first field in each of the tables, and a A1 corresponding to the last bit in the last field in each of the tables.
5.2.3.3.2
Channel quality information formats for UE-selected sub-band reports
Table 5.2.3.3.2-1 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the sub-band channel quality information feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions over a single antenna port or with open loop spatial multiplexing.
Table 5.2.3.3.2-1: UCI fields for channel quality information (CQI) feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports (single antenna port or open loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)
Field Sub-band label Sub-band CQI Bitwidth 1 or 2 4
Table 5.2.3.3.2-2 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the sub-band channel quality information feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions with closed loop spatial multiplexing.
Table 5.2.3.3.2-2: UCI fields for channel quality information (CQI) feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports (closed loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)
Field Sub-band label Sub-band CQI Spatial differential CQI Bitwidths 2 antenna ports 4 antenna ports Rank = 1 Rank = 2 Rank = 1 Rank > 1 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 4 4 4 4 0 3 0 3
Table 5.2.3.3.2-3 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the wide-band channel quality and precoding matrix information feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions with closed loop spatial multiplexing.
3GPP
Release 8
28
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 5.2.3.3.2-3: UCI fields for channel quality and precoding information (CQI/PMI) feedback for UEselected sub-band reports (closed loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)
Field Wide-band CQI Spatial differential CQI Precoding matrix indication Bitwidths 2 antenna ports 4 antenna ports Rank = 1 Rank = 2 Rank = 1 Rank > 1 4 4 4 4 0 3 0 3 2 or 3 1 or 2 4 4
Table 5.2.3.3.2-4 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the rank indication feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions for open and closed loop spatial multiplexing.
Table 5.2.3.3.2-4: UCI fields for rank indication (RI) feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports
Field Rank indication Bitwidths 4 antenna ports Max 2 layers Max 4 layers 1 2
2 antenna ports 1
The channel quality bits in Table 5.2.3.3.2-1 through Table 5.2.3.3.2-4 form the bit sequence a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 with a 0 corresponding to the first bit of the first field in each of the tables, a1 corresponding to the second bit of the first field in each of the tables, and a A1 corresponding to the last bit in the last field in each of the tables.
5.2.3.4
Channel coding for UCI channel quality information and HARQ-ACK
This section defines the channel coding scheme for the simultaneous transmission of channel quality information and HARQ-ACK information in a subframe. When normal CP is used for uplink transmission, the channel quality information is coded according to subclause , a1 , a2 , a3 ,..., a A1 and output bit sequence b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 , where B = 20 . The 5.2.3.3 with input bit sequence a0 in case one HARQ acknowledgement bit or a0 , a1 in case two HARQ HARQ acknowledgement bits are denoted by a0 acknowledgement bits are reported per subframe. Each positive acknowledgement (ACK) is encoded as a binary 0 and each negative acknowledgement (NAK) is encoded as a binary 1. The output of this channel coding block for normal CP is denoted by b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 , where
bi = bi , i = 0,..., B 1
In case one HARQ acknowledgement bit is reported per subframe:

and B = (B + 1) bB = a0
In case two HARQ acknowledgement bits are reported per subframe:

, bB+1 = a1 and B = (B + 2) bB = a0
When extended CP is used for uplink transmission, the channel quality information and the HARQ-ACK in case one HARQ acknowledgement bits are jointly coded. The HARQ acknowledgement bits are denoted by a0 acknowledgement bit or [a 0 , a1 ] in case two HARQ acknowledgement bits are reported per subframe.
block = a0 and K ACK In case one HARQ acknowledgment bit is reported in the subframe, we define a0 =1.
, a1 , a 2 ] = [a 0 )] and , a1 , (a 0 a1 In case two HARQ acknowledgment bits are reported in the subframe, we define [a 0
block K ACK = 3.
The bit sequence a 0 , a1 ,..., a AACK 1 is obtained as follows: Set i to 0.
3GPP
Release 8
29
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
while i < A ACK

a i = a imod K block
ACK
end while The coded bit sequence a 0 , a1 ,..., a AACK 1 is multiplexed with the channel quality information denoted by
, a1 , a2 , a3 ,..., a A1 to yield the sequence a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 where a0
a AACK +i = ai , i = 0,..., A 1
and A = ( AACK + A) . The sequence a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 is encoded according to section 5.2.3.3 to yield the output bit sequence b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 where B = 20 .
5.3
5.3.1
Downlink transport channels and control information

Broadcast channel
Figure 5.3.1-1 shows the processing structure for the BCH transport channel. Data arrives to the coding unit in form of a maximum of one transport block every transmission time interval (TTI) of 40ms. The following coding steps can be identified: Add CRC to the transport block Channel coding Rate matching
The coding steps for BCH transport channel are shown in the figure below.
a0 , a1 ,..., a A1
c0 , c1 ,..., c K 1
(i ) (i ) d0 , d1(i ) ,..., d D 1
r
e0 , e1 ,..., e E 1
Figure 5.3.1-1: Transport channel processing for BCH
5.3.1.1
Error detection is provided on BCH transport blocks through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).
3GPP
Release 8
30
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
The entire transport block is used to calculate the CRC parity bits. Denote the bits in a transport block delivered to layer 1 by a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 , and the parity bits by p 0 , p1 , p 2 , p 3 ,..., p L 1 . A is the size of the transport block and L is the number of parity bits. The parity bits are computed and attached to the BCH transport block according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to 16 bits. After the attachment, the CRC bits are scrambled according to the eNode-B transmit antenna configuration with the sequence x ant ,0 , x ant ,1 ,..., x ant ,15 as indicated in Table 5.3.1.1-1 to form the sequence of bits c0 , c1 , c 2 , c3 ,..., c K 1 where
ck = ak
for k = 0, 1, 2, , A-1
for k = A, A+1, A+2,..., A+15.
Table 5.3.1.1-1: CRC mask for PBCH
Number of transmit antenna ports at eNode-B 1 2 4 PBCH CRC mask
c k = ( p k A + x ant ,k A )mod 2
< x ant ,0 , x ant ,1 ,..., x ant ,15 >

<0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0> <1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1> <0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1>
5.3.1.2
Channel coding
Information bits are delivered to the channel coding block. They are denoted by c0 , c1 , c 2 , c3 ,..., c K 1 , where K is the number of bits, and they are tail biting convolutionally encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.1.
(i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) After encoding the bits are denoted by d 0 , d1(i ) , d 2 , d3 ,..., d D 1 , with i = 0,1, and 2 , and where D is the number of bits on the i-th coded stream, i.e., D = K .
5.3.1.3
Rate matching
A tail biting convolutionally coded block is delivered to the rate matching block. This block of coded bits is denoted (i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) , d1 , d2 , d3 ,..., d D by d 0 1 , with i = 0,1, and 2 , and where i is the coded stream index and D is the number of bits in each coded stream. This coded block is rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.2. After rate matching, the bits are denoted by e0 , e1 , e2 , e3 ,..., e E 1 , where E is the number of rate matched bits.
5.3.2
Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel
Figure 5.3.2-1 shows the processing structure for the DL-SCH, PCH and MCH transport channels. Data arrives to the coding unit in form of a maximum of one transport block every transmission time interval (TTI). The following coding steps can be identified: Add CRC to the transport block Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment Channel coding Rate matching Code block concatenation
The coding steps for DL-SCH, PCH and MCH transport channels are shown in the figure below.
3GPP
Release 8
31
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
a0 , a1 ,..., a A 1

b0 , b1 ,..., b B 1
Code block segmentation Code block CRC attachment

cr 0 , cr1 ,..., cr (K r 1)
Channel coding
i) d r(i0) , d r(1 ,..., d r(i() D
r 1)
Rate matching
er 0 , er1 ,..., er (Er 1)

f 0 , f1 ,..., f G 1
Figure 5.3.2-1: Transport channel processing for DL-SCH, PCH and MCH
5.3.2.1
Error detection is provided on transport blocks through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). The entire transport block is used to calculate the CRC parity bits. Denote the bits in a transport block delivered to layer 1 by a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 , and the parity bits by p 0 , p1 , p 2 , p 3 ,..., p L 1 . A is the size of the transport block and L is the number of parity bits. The parity bits are computed and attached to the transport block according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to 24 bits and using the generator polynomial gCRC24A(D).
5.3.2.2
The bits input to the code block segmentation are denoted by b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 where B is the number of bits in the transport block (including CRC). Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment are performed according to subclause 5.1.2. The bits after code block segmentation are denoted by c r 0 , c r1 , c r 2 , c r 3 ,..., c r (K r 1) , where r is the code block number and Kr is the number of bits for code block number r.
5.3.2.3
Channel coding
Code blocks are delivered to the channel coding block. They are denoted by c r 0 , c r1 , c r 2 , c r 3 ,..., c r (K r 1) , where r is the code block number, and Kr is the number of bits in code block number r. The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each code block is individually turbo encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.2.
3GPP
Release 8
32
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
i) i) After encoding the bits are denoted by d r(i0) , d r(1 , d r(i2) , d r(3 ,..., d r(i() Dr 1) , with i = 0,1, and 2 , and where Dr is the number of bits on the i-th coded stream for code block number r, i.e. Dr = K r + 4 .
5.3.2.4
Rate matching
i) i) Turbo coded blocks are delivered to the rate matching block. They are denoted by d r(i0) , d r(1 , d r(i2) , d r(3 ,..., d r(i() Dr 1) , with i = 0,1, and 2 , and where r is the code block number, i is the coded stream index, and Dr is the number of bits in each coded stream of code block number r. The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each coded block is individually rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.1.
After rate matching, the bits are denoted by er 0 , er1 , er 2 , er 3 ,..., er (Er 1) , where r is the coded block number, and where
E r is the number of rate matched bits for code block number r.
5.3.2.5
The bits input to the code block concatenation block are denoted by er 0 , er1 , er 2 , er 3 ,..., er (Er 1) for r = 0,..., C 1 and where E r is the number of rate matched bits for the r-th code block. Code block concatenation is performed according to subclause 5.1.5.2. The bits after code block concatenation are denoted by f 0 , f1, f 2 , f3 ,..., fG 1 , where G is the total number of coded bits for transmission.
5.3.3
Downlink control information
A DCI transports downlink or uplink scheduling information, or uplink power control commands for one MAC ID. The MAC ID is implicitly encoded in the CRC. Figure 5.3.3-1 shows the processing structure for the DCI. The following coding steps can be identified: Information element multiplexing CRC attachment Channel coding Rate matching
The coding steps for DCI are shown in the figure below.
3GPP
Release 8
33
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
a0 , a1 ,..., a A 1
CRC attachment
c0 , c1 ,..., c K 1
Channel coding
(i ) (i ) d0 , d1(i ) ,..., d D 1
Rate matching
e0 , e1,..., eE 1
Figure 5.3.3-1: Processing for DCI
5.3.3.1
5.3.3.1.1
DCI formats
Format 0
DCI format 0 is used for the transmission of UL-SCH assignments. The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 0: - Flag for format0/format1A differentiation 1 bit - Hopping flag 1 bit
UL UL ( N RB + 1) / 2) - Resource block assignment and hopping resource allocation log 2 ( N RB
bits
- For PUSCH hopping:

~ (i ) as indicated in subclause [8.4] of [3] - NUL_hop bits are used to obtain the value of n PRB
DL DL - log 2 ( N RB ( N RB + 1) / 2) subframe
N UL _ hop bits provide the resource allocation of the first slot in the UL
- For non-hopping PUSCH:

DL DL - log 2 ( N RB ( N RB + 1) / 2) bits provide the resource allocation of the first slot in the UL subframe
- Modulation and coding scheme and redundancy version 5 bits - New data indicator 1 bit - TPC command for scheduled PUSCH 2 bits - [Cyclic shift for DM RS 3 bits]
- UL index (this field just applies to TDD operation)
3GPP
Release 8
34
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
- CQI request 1 bit
5.3.3.1.2
Format 1
DCI format 1 is used for the transmission of DL-SCH assignments for SIMO operation. The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 1: - Resource allocation header (resource allocation type 0 / type 1) 1 bit - Resource block assignment: - For resource allocation type 0 [3],
DL / P bits provide the resource allocation - N RB
- For resource allocation type 1 [3], - log 2 (P ) bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset - 1 bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span
DL / P log 2 (P ) 1 - N RB
bits provide the resource allocation
where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in subclause [7.1.1] of [3] - Modulation and coding scheme 5 bits - HARQ process number 3 bits (FDD) , 4 bits (TDD)
- New data indicator 1 bit - Redundancy version 2 bits - TPC command for PUCCH 2 bits
5.3.3.1.3
Format 1A
DCI format 1A is used for a compact transmission of DL-SCH assignments for SIMO operation. The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 1A: - Flag for format0/format1A differentiation 1 bit - Distributed transmission flag 1 bit - Resource block assignment - Modulation and coding scheme 5bits - HARQ process number 3 bits (FDD) , 4 bits (TDD)
- New data indicator 1 bit - Redundancy version 2 bits - TPC command for PUCCH 2 bits
3GPP
Release 8
35
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.3.3.1.4
Format 2
DCI format 2 is used for the transmission of DL-SCH assignments for MIMO operation. The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 2: In general: - Resource allocation header (resource allocation type 0 / type 1) 1 bit - Resource block assignment: - For resource allocation type 0 [3],
DL / P bits provide the resource allocation - N RB
- For resource allocation type 1 [3], - log 2 (P ) bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset - 1 bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span
DL / P log 2 (P ) 1 - N RB
bits provide the resource allocation
where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in subclause [7.1.1] of [3] - TPC command for PUCCH 2 bits - Number of layers 2 bits - HARQ process number - 3 bits (FDD), 4 bits (TDD) - HARQ swap flag 1 bit - Precoding information - Precoding confirmation 1 bit For the first codeword: - Modulation and coding scheme 5 bits - New data indicator 1 bit - Redundancy version 2 bits For the second codeword: - Modulation and coding scheme [5]3 bits - New data indicator 1 bit - Redundancy version 2 bits
5.3.3.1.5
Format 3
DCI format 3 is used for the transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH with 2-bit power adjustments. The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 3: - TPC command for user 1, user 2,, user N
3GPP
Release 8
36
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.3.3.1.6
Format 3A
DCI format 3A is used for the transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH with single bit power adjustments. The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 3A: - TPC command for user 1, user 2,, user 2N
5.3.3.2
CRC attachment
Error detection is provided on DCI transmissions through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). The entire PDCCH payload is used to calculate the CRC parity bits. Denote the bits of the PDCCH payload by a 0 , a1 , a 2 , a 3 ,..., a A1 , and the parity bits by p 0 , p1 , p 2 , p 3 ,..., p L 1 . A is the PDCCH payload size and L is the number of parity bits. The parity bits are computed and attached according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to [16] bits, resulting in the sequence b0 , b1 , b2 , b3 ,..., b B 1 , where B = A+ L. After the attachment, the CRC bits are scrambled with the UE identity x ue,0 , x ue,1 ,..., x ue,15 to form the sequence of bits c 0 , c1 , c 2 , c 3 ,..., c B 1 . The relation between ck and bk is:
c k = bk c k = (bk + xue,k A ) mod 2
for k = 0, 1, 2, , A-1 for k = A, A+1, A+2,..., A+15.
5.3.3.3
Channel coding
Information bits are delivered to the channel coding block. They are denoted by c0 , c1 , c 2 , c3 ,..., c K 1 , where K is the number of bits, and they are tail biting convolutionally encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.1.
(i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) , d 1(i ) , d 2 , d3 ,..., d D After encoding the bits are denoted by d 0 1 , with i = 0,1, and 2 , and where D is the number of
bits on the i-th coded stream, i.e., D = K .
5.3.3.4
Rate matching
A tail biting convolutionally coded block is delivered to the rate matching block. This block of coded bits is denoted by
(i ) (i ) (i ) (i ) d0 , d 1(i ) , d 2 , d3 ,..., d D 1 , with i = 0,1, and 2 , and where i is the coded stream index and D is the number of bits in
each coded stream. This coded block is rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.2. After rate matching, the bits are denoted by e0 , e1 , e2 , e3 ,..., e E 1 , where E is the number of rate matched bits.
5.3.4
Control format indicator
Data arrives each subframe to the coding unit in the form of an indicator for the time span, in units of OFDM symbols, of the DCI in that subframe, i.e., CFI = 1, 2 or 3. The coding flow is shown in Figure 5.3.4-1.
CFI Channel coding
b0 , b1 ,..., b31
3GPP
Release 8
37
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Figure 5.3.4-1 Coding for CFI
5.3.4.1
Channel coding
The control format indicator is coded according to Table 5.3.4-1.

Table 5.3.4-1: CFI codewords
CFI codeword
CFI
< b0, b1, , b31 >

<0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1> <1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0>
1 2
5.3.5
Data to the unit in
HARQ indicator 3 <1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1>

4 (Reserved) <0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0> arrives coding form of
indicators for HARQ acknowledgement. The coding flow is shown in Figure 5.3.5-1.
HI Channel coding
b0 , b1 , b2
Figure 5.3.5-1 Coding for HI
5.3.5.1
Channel coding
The HARQ indicator is coded according to Table 5.3.5-1, where for a positive acknowledgement HI = 0 and for a negative acknowledgement HI = 1.
Table 5.3.5-1: HI codewords
HI codeword
HI
< b0, b1, b2 >

< 0,0,0 > < 1,1,1 >
0 1
3GPP
Release 8
38
3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Annex <X> (informative): Change history

Change history Rev Subject/Comment Skeleton Updated skeleton Endorsed skeleton Added TC. Added Broadcast, Paging and MBMS transport channels in Table 4.2-1. Endorsed v 0.2.0 Added CC. Added type of coding for each transport channel or control information. Editors version Endorsed v 0.3.0 Added QPP turbo Interleaver description. Editors version Endorsed v 0.4.0 Added CRC details for PDSCH, PDCCH and PUSCH. Added QPP turbo-interleaver parameters. Set Z to 6144. Added details on code block segmentation. Editors version For information at RAN#35 Editors version Editors version Editors version Editors version Editors version Added circular buffer rate matching for PDSCH and PUSCH. Miscellaneous changes. Editors version Editors version Endorsed by email following decision taken at RAN1#49b Editors version including decision from RAN1#49bis. Editors version Editors version Editors version with decisions from RAN1#50 Editors version - For approval at RAN#37 - Approved version 0001 - Update of 36.212 0002 - Update to 36.212 incorporating decisions from RAN1#51bis and RAN1#52
Date TSG # 2006-09 2006-10 2006-10 2006-11 2006-11 2006-12 2007-01 2007-01 2007-02 2007-02 2007-02 2007-02
TSG Doc.
CR
Old 0.0.0 0.0.1 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.2.2 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 0.4.0
New 0.0.0 0.0.1 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.2.2 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 0.4.0 0.4.1
2007-02 2007-03 2007-03 2007-03 2007-05 2007-05 2007-05 2007-06 2007-06 2007-07 2007-07 2007-08 2007-08 2007-08 2007-09 2007-09 10/09/07 12/09/07 28/11/07 05/03/08
RAN#35
RP-070170
0.4.1 0.4.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.3.0 1.3.1 1.3.2 1,4.0 1.4.1 1.4.2 2.0.0 8.0.0 8.1.0
0.4.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.3.0 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4.0 1,4,1 1.4.2 2.0.0 8.0.0 8.1.0 8.2.0
RAN#37 RAN_37 RAN_38 RAN_39
RP-070730 RP-070730 RP-070949 RP-080145
3GPP
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures (Release 8)
The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organisational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organisational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification. Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organisational Partners Publications Offices.
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Keywords
3GPP Postal address

650 Route des Lucioles Sophia Antipolis Valbonne France Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16
Internet
http://www.3gpp.org
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Contents
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................5 1 2 3
3.1 3.2
Scope ........................................................................................................................................................6 References ................................................................................................................................................6 Definitions, symbols, and abbreviations ..................................................................................................6

Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 6 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 6
4
4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4
Synchronisation procedures .....................................................................................................................7

Cell search ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 Timing synchronisation ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Synchronisation primitives........................................................................................................................... 7 Radio link monitoring .................................................................................................................................. 7 Inter-cell synchronisation............................................................................................................................. 7 Transmission timing adjustments................................................................................................................. 7
5
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.2.1 5.1.3 5.1.3.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3
Power control ...........................................................................................................................................8

Uplink power control ......................................................................................................................................... 8 Physical uplink shared channel .................................................................................................................... 8 UE behaviour.......................................................................................................................................... 8 Physical uplink control channel ................................................................................................................... 9 UE behaviour.......................................................................................................................................... 9 Sounding Reference Symbol...................................................................................................................... 10 UE behaviour........................................................................................................................................ 10 Downlink power allocation.............................................................................................................................. 11 UE behaviour ............................................................................................................................................. 11 eNodeB behaviour...................................................................................................................................... 11 Downlink channel subcarrier transmit power offset................................................................................... 11
6
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.2
Random access procedure ......................................................................................................................11

Physical non-synchronized random access procedure ..................................................................................... 12 Timing........................................................................................................................................................ 12 Synchronized ........................................................................................................................................ 12 Unsynchronized.................................................................................................................................... 12 Preamble Sequence selection ..................................................................................................................... 12
7
7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.6.1 7.1.6.2 7.1.6.3 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4
Physical downlink shared channel related procedures ...........................................................................12

UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel................................................................. 12 Single-antenna port .................................................................................................................................... 12 Transmit diversity..................................................................................................................................... 13 Open-loop spatial multiplexing ................................................................................................................ 13 Closed-loop spatial multiplexing .............................................................................................................. 13 Void .......................................................................................................................................................... 13 Resource allocation................................................................................................................................... 13 Resource allocation type 0.................................................................................................................... 13 Resource allocation type 1.................................................................................................................... 14 Resource allocation type 2.................................................................................................................... 14 UE procedure for reporting channel quality indication (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI) and rank indication (RI).................................................................................................................................................. 15 Aperiodic/Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUSCH ........................................................................ 16 Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUCCH......................................................................................... 20 Channel quality indicator (CQI) definition ................................................................................................ 23 Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) definition ............................................................................................. 25
8
8.1 8.2 8.2.1
Physical uplink shared channel related procedures ................................................................................25

Resource Allocation for PDCCH DCI Format 0.............................................................................................. 25 UE sounding procedure ................................................................................................................................... 25 Sounding definition.................................................................................................................................... 26
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
8.3 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.5
UE ACK/NACK procedure ............................................................................................................................. 26 UE PUSCH Hopping procedure ...................................................................................................................... 26 Type 1 PUSCH Hopping............................................................................................................................ 27 Type 2 PUSCH Hopping............................................................................................................................ 27 UE Reference Symbol procedure..................................................................................................................... 28
9
9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2
Physical downlink control channel procedures ......................................................................................28

UE procedure for determining physical downlink control channel assignment............................................... 28 PDCCH Assignment Procedure ................................................................................................................. 28 PHICH Assignment Procedure................................................................................................................... 28
10
10.1 10.2
Physical uplink control channel procedures...........................................................................................29

UE procedure for determining physical uplink control channel assignment ................................................... 29 Uplink ACK/NACK timing ............................................................................................................................. 29
Change history ...............................................................................................30
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Foreword
This Technical Specification (TS) has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of this present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows: Version x.y.z where: x the first digit: 1 presented to TSG for information; 2 presented to TSG for approval; 3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control. y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc. z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Scope
The present document specifies and establishes the characteristics of the physicals layer procedures in the FDD and TDD modes of E-UTRA.
References
References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or non-specific. For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply. For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same Release as the present document. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 3GPP TR 21.905: Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications 3GPP TS 36.201: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer General Description 3GPP TS 36.211: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation 3GPP TS 36.212: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding 3GPP TS 36.214: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer Measurements
3
3.1
DL N RB UL N RB Ts
Definitions, symbols, and abbreviations

Symbols
RB Downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in units of N sc as defined in [3] RB Uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in units of N sc as defined in [3] Basic time unit as defined in [3]
3.2
ACK BCH CCE CQI CRC
Abbreviations
Acknowledgement Broadcast Channel Control Channel Element Channel Quality Indicator Cyclic Redundancy Check
For the purposes of the present document, the following abbreviations apply.
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
DL DTX EPRE MCS NACK PBCH PCFICH PDCCH PDSCH PHICH PRACH PRB PUCCH PUSCH QoS RBG RE RPF RS SIR SINR SRS TA TTI UE UL UL-SCH VRB
Downlink Discontinuous Transmission Energy Per Resource Element Modulation and Coding Scheme Negative Acknowledgement Physical Broadcast Channel Physical Control Format Indicator Channel Physical Downlink Control Channel Physical Downlink Shared Channel Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel Physical Random Access Channel Physical Resource Block Physical Uplink Control Channel Physical Uplink Shared Channel Quality of Service Resource Block Group Resource Element Repetition Factor Reference Signal Signal-to-Interference Ratio Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio Sounding Reference Symbol Time alignment Transmission Time Interval User Equipment Uplink Uplink Shared Channel Virtual Resource Block
4
4.1
Synchronisation procedures
Cell search
Cell search is the procedure by which a UE acquires time and frequency synchronization with a cell and detects the physical layer Cell ID of that cell. E-UTRA cell search supports a scalable overall transmission bandwidth corresponding to 6 resource blocks and upwards. The following signals are transmitted in the downlink to facilitate cell search: the primary and secondary synchronization signals.
4.2
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3
Timing synchronisation
Synchronisation primitives Radio link monitoring Inter-cell synchronisation
[For example, for cell sites with a multicast physical channel]
4.2.4
Transmission timing adjustments
Upon reception of a timing advance command, the UE shall adjust its uplink transmission timing. The timing advance command is expressed in multiples of 16 Ts and is relative to the current uplink timing.
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
For a timing advance command received on subframe n, then corresponding adjustment occurs at the beginning of subframe n+x. Editors note: RAN1 needs to agree on x.
Power control
Downlink power control determines the energy per resource element (EPRE). The term resource element energy denotes the energy prior to CP insertion. The term resource element energy also denotes the average energy taken over all constellation points for the modulation scheme applied. Uplink power control determines the average power over a DFT-SOFDM symbol in which the physical channel is transmitted.
5.1
Uplink power control
Uplink power control controls the transmit power of the different uplink physical channels. A cell wide overload indicator (OI) is exchanged over X2 for inter-cell power control. An indication X also exchanged over X2 indicates PRBs that an eNodeB scheduler allocates to cell edge UEs and that will be most sensitive to inter-cell interference. [Note: Above lines regarding OI, X and X2 to be moved to an appropriate RAN3 spec when it becomes available]
5.1.1
5.1.1.1
Physical uplink shared channel

UE behaviour
The setting of the UE Transmit power PPUSCH for the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission in subframe i is defined by
PPUSCH (i) = min{PMAX ,10 log10 ( M PUSCH (i)) + PO_PUSCH ( j ) + PL + TF (TF (i)) + f (i)} [dBm]
where,
PMAX is the maximum allowed power that depends on the UE power class M PUSCH (i ) is the size of the PUSCH resource assignment expressed in number of resource blocks valid for subframe i.
PO_PUSCH ( j ) is a parameter composed of the sum of a 8-bit cell specific nominal component PO_NOMINAL_ PUSCH ( j ) signalled from higher layers for j=0 and 1 in the range of [-126,24] dBm with 1dB
resolution and a 4-bit UE specific component PO_UE_PUSCH ( j ) configured by RRC for j=0 and 1 in the range of [-8, 7] dB with 1dB resolution. For PUSCH (re)transmissions corresponding to a configured scheduling grant then j=0 and for PUSCH (re)transmissions corresponding to a received PDCCH with DCI format 0 associated with a new packet transmission then j=1.
{0, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1} is a 3-bit cell specific parameter provided by higher layers
PL is the downlink pathloss estimate calculated in the UE
TF (TF (i)) = 10 log10 (2 MPRK S 1) for K S = 1.25 and 0 for K S = 0 where K S is a cell specific parameter given by RRC
o o
TF (i) is the PUSCH transport format valid for subframe i

MPR = modulation x coding rate = N INFO / N RE where N INFO are the number of information bits and N RE is the number of resource elements determined from TF (i) and M PUSCH (i ) for subframe i
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
PUSCH is a UE specific correction value, also referred to as a TPC command and is included in PDCCH with
DCI format 0 or jointly coded with other TPC commands in PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A. The current PUSCH power control adjustment state is given by f (i ) which is defined by: o
f (i ) = f (i 1) + PUSCH (i K PUSCH ) if f () represents accumulation

where f (0) = 0 and K PUSCH = 4 The UE attempts to decode a PDCCH of DCI format 0 and a PDCCH of DCI format 3/3A in every subframe except when in DRX
PUSCH = 0 dB for a subframe where no TPC command is decoded or where DRX occurs.
The PUSCH dB accumulated values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 0 are [-1, 0, 1, 3]. The PUSCH dB accumulated values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A are one of [-1, 1] or [-1, 0, 1, 3] as semi-statically configured by higher layers. If UE has reached maximum power, positive TPC commands are not accumulated If UE has reached minimum power, negative TPC commands shall not be accumulated UE shall reset accumulation at cell-change when entering/leaving RRC active state when an absolute TPC command is received when PO_UE_PUSCH ( j ) is received when the UE (re)synchronizes
f (i) = PUSCH (i K PUSCH ) if f () represents current absolute value
o
where PUSCH (i K PUSCH ) was signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 0 on subframe i K PUSCH where K PUSCH = 4 The PUSCH dB absolute values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 0 are [-4,-1, 1, 4].
f (i ) = f (i 1) for a subframe where no PDCCH with DCI format 0 is decoded or where DRX occurs.
f () type (accumulation or current absolute) is a UE specific parameter that is given by RRC.
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
Physical uplink control channel

UE behaviour
The setting of the UE Transmit power PPUCCH for the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission in subframe i is defined by
PPUCCH (i) = min{PMAX , PO_PUCCH + PL + TF_PUCCH (TF ) + g (i)} [dBm]

where
TF_PUCCH (TF ) table entries for each PUCCH transport format (TF ) defined in Table 5.4-1 in [3] are given by
RRC o Each signalled TF_PUCCH (TF ) 2-bit value corresponds to a TF relative to PUCCH DCI format 0.
3GPP
Release 8T
10
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
PO_PUCCH is a parameter composed of the sum of a 5-bit cell specific parameter PO_NOMINAL_PUCCH provided
by higher layers with 1 dB resolution in the range of [-127, -96] dBm and a UE specific component PO_UE_PUCCH configured by RRC in the range of [-8, 7] dB with 1 dB resolution.
PUCCH is a UE specific correction value, also referred to as a TPC command, included in a PDCCH with DCI
format 1A/1/2 or sent jointly coded with other UE specific PUCCH correction values on a PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A. o o o o The UE attempts to decode a PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A and a PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 on every subframe except when in DRX.
PUCCH from a PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 overrides that from a PDCCH with DCI format
3/3A when both are decoded in a given subframe.
PUCCH =0 dB for a subframe where no PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2/3/3A is decoded or where
DRX occurs.
g (i ) = g (i 1) + PUCCH (i K PUCCH ) where g (i ) is the current PUCCH power control adjustment state with initial condition g (0) = 0 .

The The
PUCCH PUCCH
dB values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 are [-1, 0, 1, 3]. dB values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A are [-1,1] or [-1,0,1,3]
as semi-statically configured by higher layers. If UE has reached maximum power, positive TPC commands are not accumulated If UE has reached minimum power, negative TPC commands shall not be accumulated UE shall reset accumulation at cell-change when entering/leaving RRC active state when PO_UE_PUCCH ( j ) is received when the UE (re)synchronizes
5.1.3
5.1.3.1
Sounding Reference Symbol

UE behaviour
The setting of the UE Transmit power PSRS for the Sounding Reference Symbol transmitted on subframe i is defined by
PSRS (i) = min{PMAX , PSRS_OFFSET + 10 log10 ( M SRS ) + PO_PUSCH ( j ) + PL + f (i)} [dBm]

where
PSRS_OFFSET is a 4-bit UE specific parameter semi-statically configured by higher layers with 1dB step size in
the range [-3, 12] dB.

M SRS is the bandwidth of the SRS transmission in subframe i expressed in number of resource blocks.
f (i ) is the current power control adjustment state for the PUSCH, see Section 5.1.1.1.
PO_PUSCH ( j ) is a parameter as defined in Section 5.1.1.1.
3GPP
Release 8T
11
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.2
Downlink power allocation
The eNodeB determines the downlink transmit energy per resource element. A UE may assume downlink reference symbol EPRE is constant across the downlink system bandwidth and constant across all subframes until different RS power information is received. For each UE, the PDSCH-to-RS EPRE ratio among REs in all the OFDM symbols containing RS is equal and is denoted by A . The UE may assume that for 64 QAM or RI>1 spatial multiplexing A is equal to PA which is a UE specific semistatic parameter signalled by higher layers. For each UE, the PDSCH-to-RS EPRE ratio among REs in all the OFDM symbols not containing RS is equal and is denoted by B . The cell-specific ratio B / A is given by Table 5.2-1 according to cell-specific parameter PB signalled by higher layers and the number of configured eNodeB cell specific antenna ports. Table 5.2-1: Ratio of PDSCH-to-RS EPRE in symbols with and without reference symbols for 1, 2, or 4 cell specific antenna ports
PB
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
B / A
One Antenna Port Two Antenna Ports Four Antenna Ports
For PMCH with 16QAM or 64QAM, the UE may assume that the PMCH-to-RS EPRE ratio is equal to 0 dB.
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3
UE behaviour eNodeB behaviour Downlink channel subcarrier transmit power offset
[Definition of and restrictions on the subcarrier transmit power offset for each downlink channel type]
6 Random access procedure

Prior to initiation of the non-synchronized physical random access procedure, Layer 1 shall receive the following information from the higher layers: 1. 2. Random access channel parameters (PRACH configuration, frequency position and preamble format) Parameters for determining the root sequences and their cyclic shifts in the preamble sequence set for the cell (index to root sequence table, cyclic shift ( N CS ), and set type (normal or high-speed set))
3GPP
Release 8T
12
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
6.1
Physical non-synchronized random access procedure
From the physical layer perspective, the L1 random access procedure encompasses the transmission of random access preamble and random access response. The remaining messages are scheduled for transmission by the higher layer on the shared data channel and are not considered part of the L1 random access procedure. A random access channel occupies 6 resource blocks in a subframe or set of consecutive subframes reserved for random access preamble transmissions. The eNodeB is not prohibited from scheduling data in the resource blocks reserved for random access channel preamble transmission. The following steps are required for the L1 random access procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Layer 1 procedure is triggered upon request of a preamble transmission by higher layers. A preamble index, preamble transmission power (PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_POWER), associated RARNTI, and PRACH resource are indicated by higher layers as part of the request. A preamble sequence is then selected from the preamble sequence set using the preamble index. A single preamble transmission then occurs using the selected preamble sequence with transmission power PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_POWER on the indicated PRACH resource. If no associated PDCCH with RA-RNTI is detected within the random access response window then the corresponding DL-SCH transport block is passed to higher layers. If the random access response window has past then the physical random access procedure is exited.
6.1.1
6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2
Timing
Synchronized Unsynchronized
6.1.2
Preamble Sequence selection
7
7.1
Physical downlink shared channel related procedures

UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel
The UE is semi-statically configured via higher layer signalling to receive the physical downlink shared channel based on one of the following transmission modes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Single-antenna port Transmit diversity Open-loop spatial multiplexing Closed-loop spatial multiplexing Multi-user MIMO
7.1.1
Single-antenna port
In the single-antenna port mode, the UE may assume that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to Section 6.3.4.1 of [3]
3GPP
Release 8T
13
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
7.1.2
Transmit diversity
In the transmit diversity mode, the UE may assume that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to Section 6.3.4.3 of [3]
7.1.3
Open-loop spatial multiplexing
In the open-loop spatial multiplexing transmission mode, the UE may assume, based on the rank indication (RI) obtained from the associated DCI as determined from the number of assigned transmission layers, that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to the following: RI = 1 RI > 1 : transmit diversity as defined in Section 6.3.4.3 of [3] : large delay CDD as defined in Section 6.3.4.2.2 of [3]
For RI>1, the operation of large delay CDD is further defined as follows: For 2 antenna ports, the precoder for data resource element index i, denoted by W(i) is selected according to W (i ) = C1 where C1 denotes the precoding matrix corresponding to precoder index 1 in Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 of [3]. For 4 anetnna ports, the UE may assume that the eNB cyclically assigns different precoders to different data resource elements on the physical downlink shared channel as follows. A different precoder is used every data resource elements, where denotes the number of transmission layers in the case of spatial multiplexing. In particular, the precoder for data resource element index i, denoted by W(i) is selected i according to W (i ) = C k , where k is the precoder index given by k = mod + 1 , where k=1,2,4, 1, 4 and C1 , C 2 , C 3 , C 4 denote precoder matrices corresponding to precoder indices 12,13,14 and 15, respectively, in Table 6.3.4.2.3-2 of [3]. .
7.1.4
Closed-loop spatial multiplexing
In the closed-loop spatial multiplexing transmission mode, the UE may assume that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to zero/small delay CDD for all the applicable number of transmission layers as defined in Section 6.3.4.2.1 of [3].
7.1.5
Void
7.1.6
Resource allocation
The UE shall interpret the resource allocation field depending on the PDCCH DCI format detected. A resource allocation field in each PDCCH includes two parts, a type field and information consisting of the actual resource allocation. PDCCH with type 0 and type 1 resource allocation have the same format and are distinguished from each other via the single bit type field. For system bandwidth less than or equal to 10 PRBs the resource allocation field in each PDCCH contains only information of the actual resource allocation. PDCCH with DCI format 0 and 1A have a type 2 resource allocation which is a different format from PDCCH with a type 0 or type 1 resource allocation. PDCCH with a type 2 resource allocation do not have a type field.
7.1.6.1
Resource allocation type 0
In resource allocations of type 0, a bitmap indicates the resource block groups (RBGs) that are allocated to the scheduled UE where a RBG is a set of consecutive physical resource blocks (PRBs). Resource block group size (P) is a function of the system bandwidth as shown in Table 7.1.6.1-1. The total number of RBGs ( N RBG ) for downlink
DL DL DL system bandwidth of N RB PRBs is given by N RBG = N RB / P where N RB / P of the RBGs are of size P and if
DL DL / P N RB / P N RB
DL DL P N RB / P . The bitmap is of size N RBG bits > 0 then one of the RBGs is of size N RB
with one bitmap bit per RBG such that each RBG is addressable.
3GPP
Release 8T
14
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 7.1.6.1-1: Type 0 Resource Allocation RBG Size vs. Downlink System Bandwidth
System Bandwidth
DL N RB
RBG Size (P) 1 2 3 4
10 11 - 26 27 - 6463 64 - 110
7.1.6.2
DL In resource allocations of type 1, a bitmap of size N RB /P
indicates to a scheduled UE the PRBs from the set of
PRBs from one of P resource block group subsets. Also P is the resource block group size associated with the system bandwidth as shown in Table 7.1.6.1-1. The portion of the bitmap used to address PRBs in a selected RBG subset has TYPE1 size N RB and is defined as
TYPE1 DL N RB = N RB /P
log 2 ( P) 1
DL where N RB /P
is the overall bitmap size and log 2 ( P) is the minimum number of bits needed to select one of the
P RBG subsets and one additional bit is used to indicate whether the addressable PRBs of a selected RBG subset is left justified or is right justified (right shifted) where the shift is needed for full resource block granular addressability of all PRBs in a carrier since the number of PRBs in a RBG subset is larger than the PRB addressing portion of the bitmap as
TYPE1 DL indicated by N RB < N RB / P . Each bit in the PRB addressing portion of the bitmap addresses a single
addressable PRB in the selected RBG subset starting at the left most addressable PRB.
7.1.6.3
In resource allocations of type 2, the resource allocation information indicates to a scheduled UE a set of contiguously allocated physical or virtual resource blocks depending on the setting of a 1-bit flag carried on the associated PDCCH. PRB allocations vary from a single PRB up to a maximum number of PRBs spanning the system bandwidth. For VRB allocations .the resource allocation information consists of a starting VRB number and a number of consecutive VRBs where each VRB is mapped to multiple non-consecutive PRBs. A type 2 resource allocation field consists of a resource indication value (RIV) corresponding to a starting resource block ( RBstart ) and a length in terms of contiguously allocated resource blocks ( LCRBs ). The resource indication value is defined by
DL /2 if ( LCRBs 1) N RB
then
DL RIV = N RB ( LCRBs 1) + RBstart
else
DL DL DL RIV = N RB ( N RB LCRBs + 1) + ( N RB 1 RBstart )
3GPP
Release 8T
15
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
7.2 UE procedure for reporting channel quality indication (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI) and rank indication (RI)
The time and frequency resources that can be used by the UE to report CQI, PMI, and RI are controlled by the eNB. For spatial multiplexing, as given in [3], the UE shall determine a RI corresponding to the number of useful transmission layers. For transmit diversity as given in [3], RI is equal to one. CQI, PMI, and RI reporting is periodic or aperiodic. A UE transmits CQI, PMI, and RI reporting on a PUCCH for subframes with no PUSCH allocation. A UE transmits CQI, PMI, and RI reporting on a PUSCH for those subframes with PUSCH allocation for a) scheduled PUSCH transmissions with or without an associated scheduling grant or b) PUSCH transmissions with no UL-SCH. The CQI transmissions on PUCCH and PUSCH for various scheduling modes are summarized in the following table: Table 7.2-1: Physical Channels for Aperiodic or Periodic CQI reporting
Scheduling Mode Frequency non-selective
Periodic CQI reporting channels PUCCH PUSCH
Aperiodic CQI reporting channel PUSCH
Frequency selective
PUCCH PUSCH
PUSCH
In case both periodic and aperiodic reporting would occur in the same subframe, the UE shall only transmit the aperiodic report in that subframe. When reporting RI the UE reports a single instance of the number of useful transmission layers. For each RI reporting interval during closed-loop spatial multiplexing, a UE shall determine a RI from the supported set of RI values for the corresponding eNodeB and UE antenna configuration and report the number in each RI report. For each RI reporting interval during open-loop spatial multiplexing, a UE shall determine RI for the corresponding eNodeB and UE antenna configuration in each reporting interval and report the detected number in each RI report to support selection between RI=1 transmit diversity and RI>1 large delay CDD open-loop spatial multiplexing. When reporting PMI the UE reports either a single or a multiple PMI report. The number of RBs represented by a DL single UE PMI report can be N RB or a smaller subset of RBs. The number of RBs represented by a single PMI report is semi-statically configured by higher layer signalling. A UE is restricted to report PMI and RI within a precoder codebook subset specified by a bitmap configured by higher layer signalling. For a specific precoder codebook and associated transmission mode, the bitmap can specify all possible precoder codebook subsets from which the UE can assume the eNB may be using when the UE is configured in the relevant transmission mode. The set of subbands (S) a UE shall evaluate for CQI reporting is semi-statically configured by higher layers. A subband is a set of k contiguous PRBs where k is also semi-statically configured by higher layers. Note the last DL subband in set S may have fewer than k contiguous PRBs depending on N RB . The number of subbands for system
DL DL bandwidth given by N RB is defined by N = N RB / k . The term Wideband CQI denotes a CQI value obtained over
the set S. For single-antenna port and transmit diversity, as well as open-loop spatial multiplexing, and closed-loop spatial multiplexing with RI=1 a single 4-bit wideband CQI is reported according to Table 7.2.3-1 For RI > 1, closed-loop spatial multiplexing PUSCH based triggered reporting includes reporting a wideband CQI which comprises: o o A 4-bit wideband CQI for codeword 1 according to Table 7.2.3-1 A 4-bit wideband CQI for codeword 2 according to Table 7.2.3-1
3GPP
Release 8T
16
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
For RI > 1, closed-loop spatial multiplexing PUCCH based reporting includes separately reporting a 4-bit wideband CQI for codeword 1 according to Table 7.2.3-1 and a wideband spatial differential CQI each with a distinct reporting period and relative subframe offset. The wideband spatial differential CQI comprises: o A 3-bit wideband spatial differential CQI for codeword 2 = wideband CQI index for codeword 1 wideband CQI index for codeword 2. The set of exact offset levels is {-4, -3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3}
7.2.1
Aperiodic/Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUSCH
A UE shall perform aperiodic CQI, PMI and RI reporting using the PUSCH upon receiving an indication sent in the scheduling grant. The aperiodic CQI report size and message format is given by RRC. The minimum reporting interval for aperiodic reporting of CQI and PMI and RI is 1 subframe. The subband size for CQI shall be the same for transmitter-receiver configurations with and without precoding. A UE is semi-statically configured by higher layers to feed back CQI and PMI and corresponding RI on the same PUSCH using one of the following reporting modes given in Table 7.2.1-1 and described below: Table 7.2.1-1: CQI and PMI Feedback Types for PUSCH reporting Modes
PMI Feedback Type No PMI Wideband PUSCH CQI Feedback Type (wideband CQI) UE Selected (subband CQI) Higher Layerconfigured (subband CQI) Mode 2-0 Mode 2-1 Mode 2-2 Single PMI Multiple PMI Mode 1-2
Mode 3-0
Mode 3-1
Mode 3-2
For each of the transmission modes defined in Section 7.1, the following reporting modes are supported on PUSCH: 1. 2. 3. 4. Single-antenna port Transmit diversity Open-loop spatial multiplexing Closed-loop spatial multiplexing : Modes 2-0, 3-0 : Modes 2-0, 3-0 : Modes 2-0, 3-0 : Modes 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 3-2
The selection of PMI and the calculation of CQI are both dependent on the RI value that the UE selects for the corresponding reporting instance. Wideband feedback o Mode 1-2 description: For each subband a preferred precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission only in the subband A UE shall report one wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the corresponding selected precoding matrix in each subband and transmission on set S subbands. The UE shall report the selected precoding matrix indicator for each set S subband.
3GPP
Release 8T
17
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Subband size is given by Table 7.2.1-2.
Higher Layer-configured subband feedback o Mode 3-0 description: A UE shall report a wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming transmission on set S subbands The UE shall also report one subband CQI value for each set S subband. The subband CQI value is calculated assuming transmission only in the subband The CQI represents channel quality for the first codeword, even when RI>1.
Mode 3-1 description: A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission on set S subbands A UE shall report one subband CQI value per codeword for each set S subband which are calculated assuming the use of the single precoding matrix in all subbands A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands The UE shall report the single selected precoding matrix indicator
o
Mode 3-2 description: For each subband a preferred precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission only in the subband A UE shall report one subband CQI value per codeword for each set S subband. The subband CQI value is calculated assuming the use of the corresponding selected precoding matrix in each set S subband. A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the corresponding selected precoding matrix in each subband and transmission on set S subbands A UE shall report the selected precoding matrix indicator for each set S subband.
Subband CQI for each codeword are encoded differentially with respect to their respective wideband CQI using 2-bits as defined by Subband differential CQI = subband CQI index wideband CQI index Possible subband differential CQI values are {-2, 0, +1, +2}
Supported subband size (k) used and number of subbands (M1) in the set of subands S contained in a report include those given in Table 7.2.1-2. In Table 7.2.1-2 the k values and M1 values are semistatically configured by higher layers as a function of system bandwidth. The payload size P in bits for closed loop spatial multiplexing feedback modes (3-0, 3-1, 3-2) is given by Mode 3-0 or Mode 3-1/3-2 with RI=1:
P = R ( RI ) + 2 N + 4 + (2 + T ) C ( PMI + CQI )
Mode 3-1/3-2 with RI>1:

P = R ( RI ) + 2 (2 N + 4) + (2 + T ) C ( PMI + CQI )
3GPP
Release 8T
18
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
where T=2 if 4 antenna ports for common reference symbols are configured, for 2 antenna ports T=y, while for mode 3-0 then T=0
Editors note: RAN1 needs to agree on y. where C=N for mode 3-2 else C=1 for mode 3-1 and C=0 for mode 3-0 where R=2 for up to 4-layer spatial multiplexing else R=1 for up to 2-layer spatial multiplexing and R=0 otherwise
Table 7.2.1-2: Subband Size and #Subband CQI in S vs. System Bandwidth
System Bandwidth
DL N RB
Subband Size (k) (wideband CQI only) 4 4 6 8
#Subband CQI in S (M1)
6-7 8 - 10 11 - 26 27 - 63 64 - 110
UE-selected subband feedback o Mode 2-0 description: The UE shall select a set of M preferred subbands of size k (where k and M are given in Table 7.2.1-3 for each system bandwidth range) within the set of subbands S. The UE shall also report one CQI value reflecting transmission only over the M selected subbands determined in the previous step. The CQI represents channel quality across all layers irrespective of computed or reported RI. Additionally, the UE shall also report one wideband CQI value.
o
Mode 2-1 description: A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission on set S subbands The UE shall perform joint selection of a set of M preferred subbands of size k within the set of subbands S assuming the use of selected preferred precoding matrix. The UE shall report one CQI value per codeword reflecting transmission only over the selected M preferred subbands and using the same selected preferred single precoding matrix in each of the M subbands A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the single preferred precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands A UE shall also report the selected single preferred precoding matrix indicator for all set S subbands
o
Mode 2-2 description: The UE shall perform joint selection of the set of M preferred subbands of size k within the set of subbands S and a preferred single precoding matrix selected from the codebook subset that is preferred to be used for transmission over the M selected subbands.
3GPP
Release 8T
19
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
The UE shall report one CQI value per codeword reflecting transmission only over the selected M preferred best subbands and using the same selected single precoding matrix in each of the M subbands. The UE shall also report the selected single precoding matrix preferred for the M selected subbands. A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission on set S subbands A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands A UE shall also report the selected single precoding matrix indicator for all set S subbands.

o
For all UE-selected subband feedback modes the UE shall report the positions of the M selected subbands using a combinatorial index r defined as
r=
M 1 k =0
N sk M k
M 1 where the set {s k }k =0 , ( 1 s k N , s k < s k +1 ) contains the M sorted subband indices
x x x y is the extended binomial coefficient, resulting in unique label = and y y 0 x< y N 1 . r 0,, M
The CQI value for the M selected subbands for each codeword is encoded differentially using 2-bits relative to its respective wideband CQI as defined by Differential CQI = best-M average index wideband CQI index Possible differential CQI values are {+1, +2, +3, +4}
o o
Supported subband size k and M values include those shown in Table 7.2.1-3. In Table 7.2.1-3 the k and M values are a function of system bandwidth. The payload size (P) in bits for closed loop spatial multiplexing feedback modes (2-0, 2-1, 2-2) is given by Mode 2-0 or Mode 2-1/2-2 with RI=1: P = R (RI) + 2 + L + 4 + (2 + T ) C (CQI+PMI) Mode 2-1/2-2 with RI>1: P = R (RI) + 2 (2 + 4) + L + (2 + T ) C (CQI+PMI) where T=2 if 4 antenna ports for common reference symbols are configured, for 2 antenna ports T=y, while for mode 2-0 then T=0
Editors note: RAN1 needs to agree on y. where C=2 for mode 2-2 and C=1 for mode 2-1 and C=0 for mode 2-0
N where L = log 2 M
3GPP
Release 8T
20
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
where R=2 for up to 4-layer spatial multiplexing else R=1 for up to 2-layer spatial multiplexing and R=0 otherwise
Table 7.2.1-3: Subband Size (k) and M values vs. Downlink System Bandwidth
System Bandwidth
DL N RB
Subband Size k (RBs) (wideband CQI only) 2 2 3 4
M (wideband CQI only) 1 3 5 6
67 8 10 11 - 26 27 - 63 64 - 110
7.2.2
Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUCCH
A UE is semi-statically configured by higher layers to periodically feed back different CQI, PMI, and RI on the PUCCH using the reporting modes given in Table 7.2.2-1 and described below. For the UE-selected subband CQI, a CQI report in a certain subframe describes the channel quality in a particular part or in particular parts of the bandwidth described subsequently as bandwidth part (BP) or parts.
DL DL There are a total of N subbands for a system bandwidth given by N RB where N RB / k subbands are of size k
DL and if N RB /k
DL / k > 0 N RB
DL DL k N RB /k . then one of the subbands is of size N RB
A bandwidth part is frequency-consecutive and consists of N J subbands where J bandwidth parts span S or
DL DL DL N RB as given in Table 7.2.2-2 and where N J is N RB / k / J . Given J>1 then N J is either N RB /k/J
DL or N RB /k /J
DL , k and J. 1 depending on N RB
Each bandwidth part j is scanned in sequential order as defined by the equation j = mod( N SF , J ) where
N SF
is a counter that a UE increments after each subband report transmission for a bandwidth part.
For UE selected subband feedback a single subband out of N J subbands of a bandwidth part is selected along with a corresponding L-bit label where L = log 2 N J .
The CQI and PMI payload sizes of each PUCCH reporting mode are given in Table 7.2.2-3. Three CQI/PMI and RI reporting types with distinct periods and offsets are supported for each PUCCH reporting mode as given in Table 7.2.2-3: Type 1 report supports CQI feedback for the UE selected sub-bands Type 2 report supports wideband CQI and PMI feedback. Type 3 report supports RI feedback Type 4 report supports wideband CQI RI and wideband CQI/PMI are not reported in the same subframe (reporting instance): The reporting interval of the RI reporting is an integer multiple of wideband CQI/PMI period. The same or different offsets between RI and wideband CQI/PMI reporting instances can be configured. Both the reporting interval and offset are configured by higher layers. In case of collision of RI and wideband CQI/PMI the wideband CQI/PMI is dropped. The following PUCCH formats are used: Format 2 as defined in section 5.4.2 in [3] when CQI/PMI or RI report is not multiplexed with ACK/NAK Format 2a/2b as defined in section 5.4.2 in [3] when CQI/PMI or RI report is multiplexed with ACK/NAK for normal CP
3GPP
Release 8T
21
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Format 2 as defined in section 5.4.2 in [3] when CQI/PMI or RI report is multiplexed with ACK/NAK for extended CP
Table 7.2.2-1: CQI and PMI Feedback Types for PUCCH reporting Modes
PMI Feedback Type No PMI PUCCH CQI Feedback Type Wideband (wideband CQI) UE Selected (subband CQI) Mode 2-0 Mode 2-1 Mode 1-0 Single PMI Mode 1-1
For each of the transmission modes defined in Section 7.1, the following reporting modes are supported on PUCCH: 1. 2. 3. 4. Single-antenna port Transmit diversity Open-loop spatial multiplexing Closed-loop spatial multiplexing : Modes 1-0, 2-0 : Modes 1-0, 2-0 : Modes 1-0, 2-0 : Modes 1-1, 2-1
Wideband feedback o Mode 1-0 description: In the subframe where RI is reported (only for open-loop spatial multiplexing): A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands. The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI.
In the subframe where CQI is reported: A UE shall report a type 4 report consisting of one wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming transmission on set S subbands. For open-loop spatial multiplexing the CQI is calculated conditioned on the last reported RI.
Mode 1-1 description: In the subframe where RI is reported (only for closed-loop spatial multiplexing): A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands. The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI In the subframe where CQI/PMI is reported: A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI A UE shall report a type 2 report on each respective successive reporting opportunity consisting of o A single wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming the use of a single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI. The selected single precoding matrix indicator (wideband PMI) When RI>1, a 3-bit wideband spatial differential CQI.
o o
3GPP
Release 8T
22
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
UE Selected subband feedback o Mode 2-0 description: In the subframe where RI is reported (only for open-loop spatial multiplexing): A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands. The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI.
In the subframe where wideband CQI is reported: The UE shall report a type 4 report on each respective successive reporting opportunity consisting of one wideband CQI value conditioned on the last reported RI.
In the subframe where CQI for the selected subbands is reported: The UE shall select the preferred subband within the set of N subbands in each of the J bandwidth parts where J is given in Table 7.2.2-2. For open-loop spatial multiplexing, the selection is conditioned on the last reported RI. The UE shall report a type 1 report consisting of one CQI value reflecting transmission only over the selected subband of a bandwidth part determined in the previous step along with the corresponding best subband L-bit label. A type 1 report for each bandwidth part will in turn be reported in respective successive reporting opportunities. The CQI represents channel quality across all layers irrespective of the computed or reported RI. For open-loop spatial multiplexing, the selection is conditioned on the last reported RI
Mode 2-1 description: In the subframe where RI is reported: A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands. The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI. In the subframe where wideband CQI/PMI is reported: A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI. A UE shall report a type 2 report on each respective successive reporting opportunity consisting of: o A wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming the use of a single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI. The selected single precoding matrix indicator (wideband PMI). When RI>1, and additional 3-bit wideband spatial differential CQI.
o o
In the subframe where CQI for the selected subbands is reported: The UE shall select the preferred subband within the set of Nj subbands in each of the J bandwidth parts where J is given in Table 7.2.2-2 conditioned on the last reported wideband PMI and RI. The UE shall report a type 1 report per bandwidth part on each respective successive reporting opportunity consisting of: o A single CQI value 1 reflecting transmission only over the selected subband of a bandwidth part determined in the previous step along with the corresponding best subband L-bit label conditioned on the last reported wideband PMI and RI.
3GPP
Release 8T
23
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
If RI>1, an additional 3-bit spatial differential CQI represents the difference between CQI value 1 for codeword 1 and CQI value 2 for codeword 2 assuming the use of the most recently reported single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands.
Table 7.2.2-2: Subband Size (k) and Bandwidth Parts (J) vs. Downlink System Bandwidth
System Bandwidth
DL N RB
Subband Size k (RBs) (wideband CQI only) 4 4 6 8
Bandwidth Parts (J) 1 1 2 3 4
67 8 10 11 26 27 64 65 110
The corresponding periodicity parameters for the different CQI/PMI modes are defined as:
N P is the periodicity of the sub-frame pattern allocated for the CQI reports in terms of subframes were the
minimum reporting interval is N PMIN .

N OFFSET is the subframe offset
A UE with a scheduled PUSCH allocation in the same subframe as its CQI report shall use the same PUCCH-based reporting format when reporting CQI on the PUSCH unless an associated PDCCH with scheduling grant format indicates an aperiodic report is required. Table 7.2.2-3: PUCCH Report Type Payload size per Reporting Mode
PUCCH Reporting Modes PUCCH Report Type 1 Reported Sub-band CQI Wideband CQI/PMI Mode State Mode 1-1 (bits/BP) RI = 1 RI > 1 2 TX Antennas RI = 1 4 TX Antennas RI = 1 2 TX Antennas RI > 1 4 TX Antennas RI > 1 2-layer spatial multiplexing 4-layer spatial multiplexing RI = 1 NA NA 8 11 1 2 NA Mode 2-1 (bits/BP) 4+L 7+L 8 11 1 2 NA Mode 1-0 (bits/BP) NA NA NA NA NA NA 1 2 4 Mode 2-0 (bits/BP) 4+L 4+L NA NA NA NA 1 2 4
3 4
RI Wideband CQI
7.2.3
Channel quality indicator (CQI) definition
The number of entries in the CQI table for a single TX antenna = 16 as given by Table 7.2.3-1.
3GPP
Release 8T
24
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
A single CQI index corresponds to an index pointing to a value in the CQI table. The CQI index is defined in terms of a channel coding rate value and modulation scheme (QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM), Based on an unrestricted observation interval in time and frequency, the UE shall report the highest tabulated CQI index for which a single PDSCH sub-frame with a transport format (modulation and coding rate) and number of REs corresponding to the reported or lower CQI index that could be received in a 2-slot downlink subframe aligned, reference period ending z slots before the start of the first slot in which the reported CQI index is transmitted and for which the transport block error probability would not exceed 0.1. Editors note: RAN1 needs to agree on z. The UE may assume the following in calculating the number of REs for the CQI calculation: 3 OFDM symbols for control signaling No resources reserved for P/S-SCH and P-BCH CP length of the non-MBSFN subframe In deriving the CQI index, the UE may assume the MIMO mode (TxD or spatial multiplexing) the nominal measurement offset is a parameter semi-statically configurable by higher layers of the data EPRE with respect to the RS EPRE, from which the actual measurement offset of the data EPRE is derived
Table 7.2.3-1: 4-bit CQI Table
CQI index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
modulation
coding rate x 1024 out of range
efficiency
QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
78 120 193 308 449 602 378 490 616 466 567 666 772 873 948
0.1523 0.2344 0.3770 0.6016 0.8770 1.1758 1.4766 1.9141 2.4063 2.7305 3.3223 3.9023 4.5234 5.1152 5.5547
3GPP
Release 8T
25
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
7.2.4
Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) definition
For closed-loop spatial multiplexing transmission, precoding feedback is used for channel dependent codebook based precoding and relies on UEs reporting precoding matrix indicator (PMI). A UE shall report PMI based on the feedback modes described in 7.2.1 and 7.2.2. Each PMI value corresponds to a codebook index given in Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or Table 6.3.4.2.3-2 of [3]. For open-loop spatial multiplexing transmission, PMI reporting is not supported.
Physical uplink shared channel related procedures
For FDD, there shall be 8 HARQ processes in the uplink. For FDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDCCH with DCI format 0 and/or a PHICH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE, adjust the corresponding PUSCH transmission in subframe n+4 according to the PDCCH and PHICH information. For TDD, the number of HARQ processes shall be determined by the DL/UL configuration. For TDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDCCH with DCI format 0 and/or a PHICH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE, adjust the corresponding PUSCH transmission in subframe n+k, with k>3 according to the PDCCH and PHICH information
8.1
Resource Allocation for PDCCH DCI Format 0
A resource allocation field in the scheduling grant consists of a resource indication value (RIV) corresponding to a starting resource block ( RBSTART ) and a length in terms of contiguously allocated resource blocks ( LCRBs ). The resource indication value is defined by
UL /2 if ( LCRBs 1) N RB
then
UL RIV = N RB ( LCRBs 1) + RBSTART
else
UL UL UL RIV = N RB ( N RB LCRBs + 1) + ( N RB 1 RBSTART )
For the case where an odd number of resource block pairs have been configured for PUCCH transmissions and a UEs PUSCH resource allocation includes PRBs at a carrier band edge then the PRB of the allocated PUSCH band edge PRB pair occupied by the PUCCH resource slot will not be used for the PUSCH.
8.2
UE sounding procedure
The following Sounding Reference Symbol (SRS) parameters are UE specific semi-statically configurable by higher layer signalling: RPF=2 transmission comb assignment and location Duration of SRS transmission (valid until disabled or until the session ends) Periodicity of SRS transmissions: {2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320} ms Symbol location in the subframe Frequency hopping
3GPP
Release 8T
26
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Cyclic shift Bandwidth of SRS transmission which does not include the PUCCH region o
UL UL 6 else BW=2, 4, or 6 RB if N RB >6 Narrowband SRS: BW=2 RB if N RB
A UE shall not transmit SRS in the case of simultaneous CQI and SRS transmission. When a UE is RRC configured to support both A/N and SRS transmissions in the same subframe, then the UE shall transmit A/N using a shortened PUCCH format where the A/N symbol corresponding to the SRS location is punctured. When a UE is not RRC configured to support both A/N and SRS transmissions in the same subframe then the UE shall only transmit the A/N using PUCCH format 1a or 1b as defined in Section 5.4.1 of [3]. A UE shall not transmit SRS in the case of simultaneous SR and SRS transmission..
8.2.1
Sounding definition
8.3
UE ACK/NACK procedure
When A/N and SR are transmitted in the same sub-frame a UE shall transmit the A/N on its assigned ACK/NACK PUCCH resource for a negative SR transmission and transmit the A/N on its assigned SR PUCCH resource for a positive SR transmission. When only an ACK/NACK or only a SR is transmitted a UE shall use PUCCH Format 1a or 1b for the ACK/NACK resource and PUCCH Format 1 for the SR resource as defined in section 5.4.1 in [3].
8.4
UE PUSCH Hopping procedure
The UE shall perform PUSCH frequency hopping if the single bit frequency hopping (FH) field in a corresponding PDCCH with DCI format 0 is set otherwise no PUSCH frequency hopping is performed. A UE performing PUSCH frequency hopping shall determine its PUSCH resource allocation for the first slot of a S1 (n) ) in subframe n from a subset of the type 2 resource subframe (S1) including the lowest index PRB ( n PRB allocation field in a corresponding PDCCH with DCI format 0 received on subframe n-4. For a nonadaptive retransmission of a packet on a dynamically assigned PUSCH resource a UE shall determine its hopping type based on the last received PDCCH with DCI Format 0 associated with the packet. For a PUSCH transmission on a persistently allocated resource on subframe n in the absence of a corresponding PDCCH with a DCI Format 0 in subframe n-4, the UE shall determine its hopping type based on the hopping information in the initial grant that assigned the persistent resource allocation. The initial grant is either a PDCCH with DCI Format 0 or is higher layer signaled. The subset of the type 2 resource allocation field excludes either 1 or 2 bits used for hopping information as indicated PUSCH UL PUCCH = N RB N RB by Table 8.4-1 below where the number of PUSCH resource blocks is defined as N RB where
PUCCH N RB is defined in [3]. The resource indication value (RIV) is defined as
PUSCH RIV = N RB ( LCRBs 1) + RBSTART LCRBs 2 i =0
= 0 is the first PRB after PUCCH. i where RBSTART
A UE performing PUSCH frequency hopping shall use one of two possible PUSCH frequency hopping types based on the hopping information. PUSCH hopping type 1 is described in section 8.4.1 and type 2 is described in section 8.4.2.
3GPP
Release 8T
27
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Table 8.4-1: Min PUCCH BW, Max PUSCH BW, and Number of Hopping Bits vs. System Bandwidth
System BW
N UL RB
6-14 15-24 25-49 50-74 75-99 100-110
Minimum PUCCH BW in 1st Slot (#RBs) 1 2 Any Any Any Any
Max BW assigned to a hopping User

PUSCH / 2 N RB
#Hopping bits for 2nd slot RA 1 1 1 2 2 2
6 8 8 12 20
For either hopping type a single bit signaled by higher layers indicates whether PUSCH frequency hopping is intersubframe only or both intra and inter-subframe. Editors note: RAN1 needs to determine if hopping RB-pairing must always be supported.
8.4.1
Type 1 PUSCH Hopping
~ (i ) as defined in Table 8.4-2. For PUSCH hopping type 1 the hopping bit or bits indicated in Table 8.4-1 determine n PRB
S1 S1 ~ S 1 (i ) + N PUCCH / 2 The lowest index PRB ( n PRB ) of the 1st slot RA in subframe i is defined as n PRB (i ) = n PRB RB PUCCH nd ~ /2 . lowest index PRB ( n (i ) ) of the 2 slot RA in subframe i is defined as n (i ) = n (i ) + N
PRB
PRB
PRB
RB
. The
8.4.2
Type 2 PUSCH Hopping
~ (i ) and the lowest index PRB PUSCH hopping type 2 uses a predefined hopping sequence (PHS) to determine n PRB ~ (i ) + N PUCCH where the PHS and n ~ (i ) are ( n PRB (i ) ) of the 2nd slot RA in subframe i as defined by n PRB (i ) = n PRB PRB RB defined in [3] section 5.3.4.
Table 8.4-2: PDCCH DCI Format 0 Hopping Bit Definition
System BW N UL RB
Number of Hopping bits
Information in hopping bits 0 1
~ (i ) n PRB N PUSCH / 2 + n ~ S1 (i ) mod N PUSCH , RB PRB RB
6 49
section 5.3.4 in [3]

N PUSCH / 4 + n ~ S1 (i ) mod N PUSCH RB PRB RB N PUSCH / 4 + n ~ S1 (i ) mod N PUSCH RB PRB RB
50 110
00
01
3GPP
Release 8T
28
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
10 11
N PUSCH / 2 + n ~ S1 (i ) mod N PUSCH RB PRB RB
section 5.3.4 in [3]
8.5
UE Reference Symbol procedure
If UL sequence hopping is configured in the cell, it applies to all reference symbols (SRS, PUSCH and PUCCH RS).
9
9.1
9.1.1
Physical downlink control channel procedures

UE procedure for determining physical downlink control channel assignment
PDCCH Assignment Procedure
A UE is required to monitor a set of PDCCH candidates as often as every sub-frame. The number of candidate PDCCHs in the set and configuration of each candidate is configured by the higher layer signalling. A UE determines the control region size to monitor in each subframe based on PCFICH which indicates the number of OFDM symbols (l) in the control region (l=1, 2, or 3) and PHICH symbol duration (M) received from the PBCH where l M . For unicast subframes M=1 or 3 while for MBSFN subframes M=1 or 2. A UE shall monitor (perform blind decoding of) all candidate PDCCH payloads possible for each of its assigned search spaces in a given subframe control region. A search space is a set of aggregated control channel elements where aggregation size can be 1, 2, 4, or 8 control channel elements. There is one aggregation size per Search space. The candidate PDCCH locations in a search space occur every B control channel elements where B is the aggregation size. A UE shall be required to monitor both common and UE-specific search spaces. A common search space is monitored by all UEs in a cell and generally supports a limited number of aggregation levels, DCI format types, and blind decodes compared to the UE-specific search space. A UE-specific search space supports all aggregation levels with more blind decodes (than common search space) and for some system bandwidths only a subset of UEs in a cell monitor it. A UEspecific search space may overlap with a common search space.
9.1.2
PHICH Assignment Procedure
For scheduled PUSCH transmissions, a UE shall implicitly determine the corresponding PHICH resource in subframe n from the lowest index PRB of the uplink resource allocation and the 3-bit uplink demodulation reference symbol (DMRS) cyclic shift both indicated in the PDCCH with DCI format 0 received on subframe n-4. The PHICH resource group seq group seq , n PHICH ) where n PHICH is identified by the index pair (n PHICH is the PHICH group number and n PHICH is the orthogonal sequence index within the group as defined by:
group lowest _ index group n PHICH = ( I PRB + n DMRS ) mod N PHICH _ RA seq lowest _ index group n PHICH = ( I PRB / N PHICH _ RA
PHICH + n DMRS ) mod 2 N SF
where
n DMRS is the cyclic shift of the DMRS used in the UL transmission for which the PHICH is related.
PHICH N SF is the spreading factor size used for PHICH modulation as described in section 6.9.1 in [3].
3GPP
Release 8T
29
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
lowest _ index is the lowest index PRB of the uplink resource allocation I PRB _ RA
group N PHICH is the number of PHICH groups configured
10
10.1
Physical uplink control channel procedures

UE procedure for determining physical uplink control channel assignment
The resource blocks reserved for PUCCHs in a sub-frame are semi-statically configured. For a PDSCH transmission on subframe n corresponding to a PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 received on subframe n4, the UE shall determine the PUCCH index for ACK/NACK implicitly from the lowest CCE index used to construct the associated PDCCH. For each PDSCH transmission corresponding to a configured scheduling assignment the UE shall use a PUCCH index for ACK/NACK previously received explicitly from higher layer signalling associated with the configured scheduling assignment. While the configured scheduling assignment is valid a UE shall continue to use the explicitly signalled PUCCH index for ACK/NACK for a PDSCH transmission on subframe n when no corresponding PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 was received on subframe n-4.
10.2
Uplink ACK/NACK timing
For FDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDSCH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE and for which an ACK/NACK shall be provided, transmit the ACK/NACK response in subframe n+4. For TDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDSCH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE and for which an ACK/NACK shall be provided, transmit the ACK/NACK response in UL subframe n+k, with k>3. For TDD, the use of a single ACK/NACK response for providing HARQ feedback for multiple PDSCH transmissions is supported by performing logical AND of all the corresponding individual PDSCH transmission ACK/NACKs.
3GPP
Release 8T
30
3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

Change history
Date TSG # 2006-09 2006-10 2007-01 2007-01 2007-02 2007-02 2007-02 2007-03 2007-03 RAN#35 2007-03 2007-03 2007-03 2007-05 2007-05 2007-05 2007-08 2007-08 2007-08 2007-09 2007-09 2007-09 2007-09 2007-09 2007-09 RAN#37 2007-09 RAN#37 12/09/07 RAN_37 28/11/07 RAN_38 05/03/08 RAN_39 TSG Doc. Rev Subject/Comment Draft version created Endorsed by RAN1 Inclusion of decisions from RAN1#46bis and RAN1#47 Endorsed by RAN1 Inclusion of decisions from RAN1#47bis Endorsed by RAN1 Editors version including decisions from RAN1#48 & RAN1#47bis Updated Editors version RP-070171 For information at RAN#35 Random access text modified to better reflect RAN1 scope Updated Editors version Endorsed by RAN1 Updated Editors version Updated Editors version Endorsed by RAN1 Updated Editors version Updated Editors version uplink power control from RAN1#49bis Endorsed by RAN1 Updated Editors version reflecting RAN#50 decisions Updated Editors version reflecting comments Updated Editors version reflecting further comments Updated Editors version reflecting further comments Updated Edtiors version reflecting further comments RP-070731 Endorsed by RAN1 RP-070737 For approval at RAN#37 RP-070737 - Approved version RP-070949 0001 2 Update of 36.213 RP-080145 0002 - Update of TS36.213 according to changes listed in cover sheet CR Old 0.0.0 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3.0 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 2.0.0 2.1.0 8.0.0 8.1.0 New 0.0.0 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.3.0 0.3.1 0.3.2 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.0 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3.0 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 2.0.0 2.1.0 8.0.0 8.1.0 8.2.0
3GPP
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer Measurements (Release 8)
The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organizational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organizational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification. Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organizational Partners Publications Offices.
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Keywords
3GPP Postal address

650 Route des Lucioles Sophia Antipolis Valbonne Franc e Tel. : +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax : +33 4 93 65 47 16
Internet
http ://www.3gpp.org
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Contents
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................4 1 2 3
3.1 3.2 3.3

4 5
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.1.8 5.1.9 5.1.10 5.1.11 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2
Control of UE/E-UTRAN measurements.................................................................................................6 Measurement capabilities for E-UTRA....................................................................................................6

UE measurement capabilities............................................................................................................................. 7 Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) .................................................................................................. 7 E-UTRA Carrier RSSI ................................................................................................................................. 7 Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ)............................................................................................... 7 UTRA FDD CPICH RSCP .......................................................................................................................... 8 UTRA FDD carrier RSSI ............................................................................................................................. 8 UTRA FDD CPICH Ec/No .......................................................................................................................... 8 GSM carrier RSSI ........................................................................................................................................ 8 UTRA TDD carrier RSSI............................................................................................................................. 9 UTRA TDD P-CCPCH RSCP ..................................................................................................................... 9 CDMA2000 1x RTT Pilot Strength ............................................................................................................. 9 CDMA2000 HRPD Pilot Strength ............................................................................................................... 9 E-UTRAN measurement abilities ...................................................................................................................... 9 DL RS TX power ....................................................................................................................................... 10 Measurement 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 10
Change history ...............................................................................................10
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Foreword
This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows: Version x.y.z where: x the first digit: 1 presented to TSG for information; 2 presented to TSG for approval; 3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control. Y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc. z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
Scope
The present document contains the description and definition of the measurements done at the UE and network in order to support operation in idle mode and connected mode.
References
References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or non-specific. For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply. For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same Release as the present document. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] 3GPP TR 21.905: Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications. 3GPP TS 36.201: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer General Description . 3GPP TS 36.211: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation. 3GPP TS 36.212: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding . 3GPP TS 36.213: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures . 3GPP TS 36.321: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification. 3GPP TS 36.331: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification . 3GPP2 CS.0005-D v1.0 Upper Layer (Layer 3) Signaling Standard for CDMA2000 Spread Spectrum Systems Release D. 3GPP2 CS.0024-A v3.0 cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification 3GPP TS 36.104: Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission and reception .
3
3.1

Definitions
For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
3.2
Ec/No
Symbols
Received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band
3.3
Abbreviations
For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. An abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in TR 21.905 [1]. 1x RTT CPICH E-UTRA E-UTRAN FDD GSM HRPD P-CCPCH RSCP RSRP RSRQ RSSI TDD UTRA UTRAN CDMA2000 1x Radio Transmission Technology Common Pilot Channel Evolved UTRA Evolved UTRAN Frequency Division Duplex Global System for Mobile communication CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data Primary Common Control Physical Channel Received Signal Code Power Reference Signal Received Power Reference Signal Received Quality Received Signal Strength Indicator Time Division Duplex Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
Control of UE/E-UTRAN measurements
In this chapter the general measurement control concept of the higher layers is briefly described to provide an understanding on how L1 measurements are initiated and controlled by higher layers. With the measurement specifications L1 provides measurement capabilities for the UE and E-UTRAN. These measurements can be classified in different reported measurement types: intra-frequency, inter-frequency, inter-system, traffic volume, quality and UE internal measurements (see the RRC Protocol [7]). In the L1 measurement definitions, see chapter 5, the measurements are categorised as measurements in the UE (the messages for these will be described in the MAC Protocol [6] or RRC Protocol [7]) or measurements in the E-UTRAN (the messages for these will be described in the Frame Protocol). To initiate a specific measurement, the E-UTRAN transmits a RRC connection reconfiguration message' to the UE including a measurement ID and type, a command (setup, modify, release), the measurement objects, the measurement quantity, the reporting quantities and the reporting criteria (periodical/event-triggered), see [7]. When the reporting criteria are fulfilled the UE shall answer with a 'measurement report message' to the E-UTRAN including the measurement ID and the results. For idle mode, the measurement information elements are broadcast in the System Information.
Measurement capabilities for E-UTRA
In this chapter the physical layer measurements reported to higher layers are defined.
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.1
UE measurement capabilities
The structure of the table defining a UE measurement quantity is shown below.
Column field Definition Applicable for
Comment Contains the definition of the measurement. States in which state(s) it shall be possible to perform this measurement. The following terms are used in the tables: RRC_IDLE; RRC_CONNECTED; Intra-frequency appended to the RRC state: Shall be possible to perform in the corresponding RRC state on an intra-frequency cell; Inter-frequency appended to the RRC state: Shall be possible to perform in the corresponding RRC state on an inter-frequency cell Inter-RAT appended to the RRC state: Shall be possible to perform in the corresponding RRC state on an inter-RAT cell.
5.1.1
Definition
Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)
Applicable for
Reference signal received power (RSRP), is determined for a considered cell as the linear average over the power contributions (in [W]) of the resource elements that carry cell-specific reference signals within the considered measurement frequency bandwidth. For RSRP determination the cell-specific reference signals R0 and if available R1 according TS 36.211 [3] can be used. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the reported value shall be equivalent to the linear average of the power values of all diversity branches. RRC_IDLE intra-frequency, RRC_IDLE inter-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED intra-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED inter-frequency
Note: The number of resource elements within the considered measurement frequency bandwidth and within the measurement period that are used by the UE to determine RSRP is left up to the UE implementation with the limitation that corresponding measurement accuracy requirements have to be fulfilled.
5.1.2
Definition
E-UTRA Carrier RSSI
Applicable for
E-UTRA Carrier Received Signal Strength Indicator, comprises the total received wideband power observed by the UE from all sources, including co-channel serving and non-serving cells, adjacent channel interference, thermal noise etc. TBD
5.1.3
Definition
Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ)
Applicable for
Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ) is defined as the ratio NRSRP/(E-UTRA carrier RSSI), where N is the number of RBs of the E-UTRA carrier RSSI measurement bandwidth. The measurements in the numerator and denominator shall be made over the same set of resource blocks. RRC_IDLE intra-frequency, RRC_IDLE inter-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED intra-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED inter-frequency
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.1.4
Definition
UTRA FDD CPICH RSCP
Applicable for
Received Signal Code Power, the received power on one code measured on the Primary CPICH. The reference point for the RSCP shall be the antenna connector of the UE. If Tx diversity is applied on the Primary CPICH the received code power from each antenna shall be separately measured and summed together in [W] to a total received code power on the Primary CPICH. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the reported value shall not be lower than the corresponding CPICH RSCP of any of the individual receive antenna branches. RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
5.1.5
Definition
UTRA FDD carrier RSSI
Applicable for
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna connector of the UE. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the reported value shall not be lower than the corresponding UTRA carrier RSSI of any of the individual receive antenna branches. RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
5.1.6
Definition
UTRA FDD CPICH Ec/No
Applicable for
The received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band. If receiver diversity is not in use by the UE, the CPICH Ec/No is identical to CPICH RSCP/UTRA Carrier RSSI. Measurement shall be performed on the Primary CPICH. The reference point for the CPICH Ec/No shall be the antenna connector of the UE. If Tx diversity is applied on the Primary CPICH the received energy per chip (Ec) from each antenna shall be separately measured and summed together in [Ws] to a total received chip energy per chip on the Primary CPICH, before calculating the Ec/No. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the measured CPICH Ec/No value shall not be lower than the corresponding CPICH RSCPi/UTRA Carrier RSSIi of receive antenna branch i . RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
5.1.7
Definition
GSM carrier RSSI
Applicable for
Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the relevant channel bandwidth. Measurement shall be performed on a GSM BCCH carrier. The reference point for the RSSI shall be the antenna connector of the UE. RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
3GPP
Release 8T
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.1.8
Definition
UTRA TDD carrier RSSI
Applicable for
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna connector of the UE. RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
5.1.9
Definition
UTRA TDD P-CCPCH RSCP
Applicable for
Received Signal Code Power, the received power on P-CCPCH of a neighbour UTRA TDD cell. The reference point for the RSCP shall be the antenna connector of the UE. RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
5.1.10
CDMA2000 1x RTT Pilot Strength
Definition Applicable for
CDMA2000 1x RTT Pilot Strength measurement is defined in section 2.6.6.2.2 of [8] RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
5.1.11
CDMA2000 HRPD Pilot Strength
Definition Applicable for
CDMA2000 HRPD Pilot Strength Measurement is defined in section 8.7.6.1.2.3 of [9] RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT
5.2
E-UTRAN measurement abilities
The structure of the table defining a E-UTRAN measurement quantity is shown below.
Column field Definition
Comment Contains the definition of the measurement.
The term "antenna connector" used in this sub-clause to define the reference point for the E-UTRAN measurements refers to the "BS antenna connector" test port A and test port B as described in [10]. The term "antenna connector" refers to Rx or Tx antenna connector as described in the respective measurement definitions.
3GPP
Release 8T
10
3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)
5.2.1
Definition
DL RS TX power
Downlink reference signal transmit power is determined for a considered cell as the linear average over the power contributions (in [W]) of the resource elements that carry cell-specific reference signals which are transmitted by the eNode B within its operating system bandwidth. For DL RS TX power determination the cell-specific reference signals R0 and if available R1 according TS 36.211 [3] can be used. The reference point for the DL RS TX power measurement shall be the TX antenna connector.
5.2.2
Measurement 2

Change history
Date TSG # 02/10/06 11/10/06 13/10/06 27/02/07 05/03/07 03/05/07 08/03/07 31/05/07 RAN#36 21/06/07 25/06/07 17/08/07 20/08/07 10/09/07 RAN#37 12/09/07 RAN_37 28/11/07 RAN_38 05/03/08 RAN_39 TSG Doc. CR Rev Subject/Comment Draft version created Minor editorial updates for RAN1#46bis Endorsed skeleton Update after 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 #48 RAN1 endorsed version Update after 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#48bis RAN WG1#49 endorsed version RP-070490 Presented for information at RAN#36 Update after 3GPP TSG RAN #36 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#49bis endorsed version Update after 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#48bis 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#50 endorsed version RP-070732 For approval at RAN#37 RP-070732 - Approved version RP-070949 1 1 RRC state correction for LTE UE measurements RP-080145 003 1 Inclusion of agreements from RAN1#51bis and RAN1#52 Old 0.0.0 0.0.1 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.3.0 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.2.0 2.0.0 8.0.0 8.1.0 New 0.0.0 0.0.1 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.2.0 0.2.1 0.3.0 1.0.0 1.0.1 1.1.0 1.1.1 1.2.0 2.0.0 8.0.0 8.1.0 8.2.0
3GPP

LTE Physical Layer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LTE Physical Layer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

3GPP Postal address

3GPP support office address

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

General description of LTE Layer 1 ........................................................................................................6

Document structure of LTE physical layer specification .........................................................................9

Annex A (informative): Annex B (informative):

Preferred mathematical notations................................................................12 Change history ...............................................................................................13

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

Definitions, symbols and abbreviations

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

General description of LTE Layer 1

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

Layer 3 Control / Measurements

Radio Resource Control (RRC)

Logical channels Medium Access Control Transport channels Physical layer

Service provided to higher layers

General description of Layer 1

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

Physical channels and modulation

The physical channels defined in the downlink are:

MBMSLTE MBMSMBSFN cell MBSFNMBMSUE cellCP MBSFNUE cell

PRACH PUSCH PUCCH

Channel coding and interleaving

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

Physical layer procedures

Physical layer measurements

Document structure of LTE physical layer specification

To/From Higher Layers

Figure 2: Relation between Physical Layer specifications

TS 36.201: Physical layer General description

The scope is to describe:

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

TS 36.211: Physical channels and modulation

TS 36.212: Multiplexing and channel coding

TS 36.213: Physical layer procedures

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

TS 36.214: Physical layer Measurements

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

Annex A (informative): Preferred mathematical notations

{ai }i{1, 2,, p}

binary xor and and

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)

Annex B (informative): Change history

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3GPP Postal address

3GPP support office address

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

Modulation and upconversion.......................................................................................................................... 61

Generic functions ...................................................................................................................................61

Change history ...............................................................................................64

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Definitions, symbols and abbreviations

Number of modulation symbols to transmit on a physical channel [for code word q ]

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)

Number of modulation symbols to transmit per layer for a physical channel